Additional Financial Information - Part 1

Standard Chartered PLC
23 February 2024
 

Standard Chartered PLC - Additional Financial information

Highlights

Standard Chartered PLC (the Group) today releases its results for the year ended 31 December 2023. The following pages provide additional information related to the announcement.

Table of contents

Risk review and Capital review


Risk profile

2

Enterprise Risk Management Framework

67

Principal risks

74

Capital review

94

Statement of directors' responsibilities

100

Shareholder information

102



Page 1

Risk profile

Credit Risk (audited)

Basis of preparation

Unless otherwise stated the balance sheet and income statement information presented within this section is based on the Group's management view. This is principally the location from which a client relationship is managed, which may differ from where it is financially booked and may be shared between businesses and/or regions. This view reflects how the client segments and regions are managed internally.

Loans and advances to customers and banks held at amortised cost in this Risk profile section include reverse repurchase agreement balances held at amortised cost, per Note 16 Reverse repurchase and repurchase agreements including other similar secured lending and borrowing.

Credit Risk overview

Credit Risk is the potential for loss due to the failure of a counterparty to meet its contractual obligations to pay the Group. Credit exposures arise from both the banking and trading books.

Impairment model

IFRS 9 mandates an impairment model that requires the recognition of expected credit losses (ECL) on all financial debt instruments held at amortised cost, Fair Value through Other Comprehensive Income (FVOCI), undrawn loan commitments and financial guarantees.

Staging of financial instruments

Financial instruments that are not already credit-impaired are originated into stage 1 and a 12-month expected credit loss provision is recognised.

Instruments will remain in stage 1 until they are repaid, unless they experience significant credit deterioration (stage 2) or they become credit-impaired (stage 3).

Instruments will transfer to stage 2 and a lifetime expected credit loss provision is recognised when there has been a significant change in the Credit Risk compared to what was expected at origination.

The framework used to determine a significant increase in credit risk is set out below.

Stage 2

Lifetime expected credit loss

Performing but has exhibited significant increase in Credit Risk (SICR)

Stage 3

Credit-impaired

Non-performing

Stage 1

12-month ECL

Performing

IFRS 9 expected credit loss principles and approaches

The main methodology principles and approach adopted by the Group are set out in the following table.

Title

Supplementary Information

Approach for determining expected credit losses

IFRS 9 methodology

Determining lifetime expected credit loss for revolving products

Post model adjustments

Incorporation of forward-looking information

Incorporation of forward-looking information

Forecast of key macroeconomic variables underlying the expected credit loss calculation and the impact of non-linearity

Judgemental adjustments and sensitivity to macroeconomic variables

Significant increase in credit risk (SICR)

Quantitative and qualitative criteria

Assessment of credit-impaired financial assets

Consumer and Business Banking clients

CCIB and Private Banking clients

Write-offs

Transfers between stages

Movement in loan exposures and expected credit losses

Modified financial assets

Forbearance and other modified loans

Governance and application of expert credit judgement in respect of expected credit losses


Page 2

Summary of performance in 2023

Loans and Advances

94 per cent (31 December 2022: 93 per cent) of the Group's gross loans and advances to customers remain in stage 1 at $273.7 billion (31 December 2022: $295.2 billion), reflecting our continued focus on high-quality origination.

Stage 1 loans decreased by $21.5 billion to $274 billion (31 December 2022: $295 billion). For Corporate, Commercial and Institutional Banking (CCIB), stage 1 balances increased to 90 per cent of the gross loans and advances to customers (31 December 2022: 88 per cent), while there was an overall decrease due to reductions in the financing, insurance and non-banking sectors. Stage 1 balances for Consumer, Private and Business Banking (CPBB) decreased by $5.6 billion, mainly driven by a slowdown in mortgages sales in Korea and Hong Kong, which was partly offset by new Credit Cards and Personal Loans businesses in Asia. Stage 1 balances for Central and other items decreased by $10.8 billion due to exposure reductions to a Central Bank in the Asia region. Stage 1 cover ratio remained stable at 0.2 per cent (31 December 2022: 0.2 per cent).

Stage 2 gross loans and advances to customers decreased by $1.8 billion to $11.2 billion (31 December 2022: $13 billion). This was due to CCIB exposure reductions and transfers to stage 3 in the Commercial Real Estate (CRE) sector, and exposure reductions in the Transport sector. This was partially offset by an increase in CPBB Korea and Hong Kong Mortgage portfolio and Singapore Private Banking. Higher risk exposure net increase of $1 billion from Central and other items, was due to a short-term exposure to a Central Bank in the Africa and Middle East region, which was partly offset by exposure reductions and transfers to stage 3 in CCIB. Stage 2 cover ratio increased by 0.3 per cent to 3.7 per cent (31 December 2022: 3.4 per cent). The increase was driven by Ventures due to increased delinquencies and portfolio growth mainly in Mox Bank. The increase in CCIB cover ratio was due to a decrease in expected credit losses from exposure reductions and transfers to Stage 3. The decrease in CPBB stage 2 cover ratio was mainly due to an increase in secured portfolio exposures with relatively lower Loss Given Default.

Stage 3 loans decreased by $0.6 billion to $7.2 billion (31 December 2022: $7.8 billion) as a result of repayments, debt sales and write-offs in CCIB. Although the portfolio reduced year on year, China CRE clients were the major inflows this year. The CCIB stage 3 cover ratio increased by 4.5 per cent to 64 per cent as a result of repayments and incremental provisions taken (31 December 2022: 60 per cent). The CPBB stage 3 cover ratio reduced by 2.2 per cent to 51 per cent (31 December 2022: 53 per cent), due to a small exposure increase mainly in Secured wealth products. Ventures stage 3 exposures increased by $11 million to $12 million (31 December 2022: $1 million). The cover ratio after collateral remained stable at 76 per cent (31 December 2022: 76 per cent)

Further details can be found in the 'Analysis of financial instruments by stage' section; 'Credit quality by client segment' section; 'Credit quality by industry' section. Stage 3 cover ratio is also disclosed in the 'Stage 3 cover ratio' and 'Credit-impaired (stage 3) loans and advances by geographic region' sections.

Maximum exposure

The Group's on-balance sheet maximum exposure to Credit Risk increased by $8.6 billion to $798 billion (31 December 2022: $790 billion). Cash at Central bank increased by $11.6 billion to $70 billion (31 December 2022: $58 billion) due to deposits placed with the US Federal Reserve. Loans to banks also increased by $5 billion to $45 billion (31 December 2022: $40 billion). Fair Value through profit and loss increased by $42 billion to $144 billion (31 December 2022: $103 billion), largely due to an increase in Debt Securities and Reverse Repos. This was partly offset by a $13 billion decrease in Derivative financial instruments, and a $23.7 billion decrease in loans and advances to customers to $287 billion (31 December 2022: $311 billion). Out of the $23.7 billion decrease in loans and advances to customers, a $10.5 billion reduction relates to reverse repos, and a $11 billion reduction relates to Amortised Cost Debt Securities, as part of the Group's liquidity management actions. Off-balance sheet instruments increased by $28 billion to $257 billion (31 December 2022: $229 billion), which was driven by new businesses.

Further details can be found in the 'Maximum exposure to Credit Risk'section.



Page 3

Analysis of stage 2

The key SICR driver that caused exposures to be classified as stage 2 remains increase in probability of default. The proportion of exposures in CCIB in stage 2 due to increased PD has decreased partly due to an increase in clients placed on non-purely precautionary early alert that have not breached PD thresholds. In CPBB, the proportion of loans in stage 2 loans from 30 days past due trigger decreased by 2 per cent to 6 per cent (31 December 2022: 8 per cent). 'Others' category includes exposures where origination data is incomplete and the exposures are getting allocated into stage 2.

Further details can be found in the 'Analysis of stage 2 balances' section.

Credit impairment charges

The Group's ongoing credit impairment was a net charge of $508 million (31 December 2022: $836 million).

For CCIB, stage 1 and 2 impairment charges decreased by $137 million to $11 million (31 December 2022: $148 million), as 2022 included Pakistan Sovereign downgrades and China CRE overlays, which was partly offset by a $102 million full release of COVID-19 overlay. In 2023, $11 million impairment charges were due to portfolio movements, including impairments on Pakistan Sovereign clients, and China CRE overlays, which was partly offset by a $13 million net release from model and methodology updates.

CCIB stage 3 impairment charges decreased by $165 million to $112 million (31 December 2022: $277 million) largely due to higher releases and lower impairments on China CRE clients. In 2023, $112 million impairment charges were largely driven by impairments on China CRE clients, and releases across multiple clients.

For CPBB, stage 1 and 2 impairment charges decreased by $22 million to $129 million (31 December 2022: $151 million). In 2023, $129 million impairment charges were from normal flows, largely from unsecured portfolios in China, Hong Kong, India and Singapore. This was partially offset by $21 million of COVID-19 overlay releases, including the full release of $16 million remaining COVID-19 overlays in Bahrain.

CPBB stage 3 impairment charges increased by $114 million to $225 million (31 December 2022: $111 million). The increase has been driven mainly by the unsecured business due to a mix of higher bankruptcies in Singapore, Hong Kong and Korea, and portfolio growth in digital partnerships. 

For Ventures, stage 1 and 2 impairment charges increased by $29 million to $42 million (31 December 2022: $13 million), mainly due to portfolio growth in Mox Bank.

Ventures stage 3 impairment charges increased by $40 million to $43 million (31 December 2022: $3 million), mainly due to portfolio growth in Mox Bank, and higher bankruptcies. Mitigating actions have been taken to address these.

For Central and other items, stage 1 and 2 impairment charges decreased by $139 million due to a net release of $44 million (31 December 2022: $95 million) as 2022 included Pakistan Sovereign CG12 downgrades. In 2023, $44 million net release of impairment charges were driven by exposure reductions and shortening tenors of balances to the Pakistan Government. This was partly offset by a $8 million charge due to Kenya Sovereign downgrade.

Central and other items stage 3 impairment charges decreased by $28 million to $10 million (31 December 2022: $38 million) as Sri Lanka and Ghana exposures were downgraded to Stage 3 in 2022.

Further details can be found in the 'Credit impairment charge' section.



Page 4

Vulnerable and Cyclical Sectors

Total net on-balance sheet exposure to vulnerable and cyclical sectors decreased by $3 billion to $29 billion (31 December 2022: $32 billion) largely due to the exit of the Aviation business and lower drawn balances particularly in the CRE sector, where on-balance sheet exposure decreased by $1.8 billion to $14.5 billion (31 December 2022: $16.3 billion). Stage 2 vulnerable and cyclical sector loans decreased by $2.3 billion to $3.3 billion (31 December 2022: $5.6 billion), primarily driven by a $1.4 billion exposure reduction in the CRE sector and transfers to Stage 3. Stage 3 vulnerable and cyclical sector loans decreased by $0.5 billion to $3.6 billion (31 December 2022: $4 billion), mainly due to the Oil and Gas, and Commodity sectors, which was partly offset by new inflows into the CRE sector.

The Group provides loans to CRE counterparties of which $9.6 billion is to counterparties in the CCIB segment where the source of repayment is substantially derived from rental or sale of real estate and is secured by real estate collateral. The remaining CRE loans comprise working capital loans to real estate corporates, loans with non-property collateral, unsecured loans and loans to real estate entities of diversified conglomerates. The average LTV ratio of the performing book CRE portfolio has increased to 52 per cent (31 December 2022: 49 per cent). The proportion of loans with an LTV greater than 80 per cent has increased to 3 per cent (31 December 2022: 1 per cent).

Further details can be found in the 'Vulnerable, cyclical and high carbon sectors' section.

China commercial real estate

Total exposure to China CRE decreased by $0.8 billion to $2.6 billion (31 December 2022: $3.4 billion) mainly from exposure reductions. The proportion of credit impaired exposures increased to 58 per cent (31 December 2022: 33 per cent) as market conditions continued to deteriorate during the period, and provision coverage increased to 72 per cent (31 December 2022: 56 per cent) reflecting increased provision charges during the period. The proportion of the loan book rated as Higher Risk decreased by 8 per cent to 0.3 per cent (31 December 2022: 8.4 per cent) primarily due to downgrades in the period.

The Group continues to hold a judgemental management overlay, which decreased by $32 million to $141 million (31 December 2022: $173 million), reflecting changes in the portfolio and downgrades to Stage 3.

The Group is further indirectly exposed to China CRE through its associate investment in China Bohai Bank.

Further details can be found in the 'China commercial real estate' section.

Management adjustments

Given the evolving nature of the risks in the China CRE sector, a management overlay of $141 million (31 December 2022: $173 million) has been taken by estimating the impact of further deterioration to exposures in this sector. Overlays of $5 million (31 December 2022: $16 million) have been applied in CPBB to capture macroeconomic environment challenges caused by sovereign defaults or heightened sovereign risk and an overlay of $17 million (31 December 2022: nil) was applied in Central and other items, due to a temporary market dislocation in the Africa and Middle East.

The remaining COVID-19 overlay in CPBB of $21 million that was held at 31 December 2022 has been fully released in 2023. The stage 3 overlay in CCIB of $9 million that was held at 31 December 2022, following the Sri Lanka Sovereign default was also fully released in 2023.

Further details can be found in the 'Judgemental management overlays' section. Model performance and judgemental post model adjustments are also disclosed in the 'Model performance post model adjustments' section.



Page 5

Maximum exposure to Credit Risk (audited)

The table below presents the Group's maximum exposure to credit risk for its on-balance sheet and off-balance sheet financial instruments as at 31 December 2023, before and after taking into account any collateral held or other credit risk mitigation.


2023


2022

Maximum exposure
$million

Credit risk management

Net Exposure
$million

Maximum exposure
$million

Credit risk management

Net exposure
$million

Collateral8
$million

Master netting agreements
$million

Collateral8
$million

Master netting agreements
$million

On-balance sheet










Cash and balances at central banks

69,905



69,905


58,263



58,263

Loans and advances to banks1

44,977

1,738


43,239


39,519

978


38,541

of which - reverse repurchase agreements and other similar
secured lending7

1,738

1,738


-


978

978


-

Loans and advances to customers1

286,975

118,492


168,483


310,647

135,194


175,453

of which - reverse repurchase agreements and other similar
secured lending7

13,996

13,996


-


24,498

24,498


-

Investment securities - Debt securities and other eligible bills2

160,263



160,263


171,640



171,640

Fair value through profit or loss3, 7

144,276

81,847

-

62,429


102,575

64,491

-

38,084

Loans and advances to banks

2,265



2,265


976



976

Loans and advances to customers

7,212



7,212


6,546



6,546

Reverse repurchase agreements and other similar lending7

81,847

81,847


-


64,491

64,491


-

Investment securities - Debt securities and other eligible bills2

52,952



52,952


30,562



30,562

Derivative financial instruments4, 7

50,434

8,440

39,293

2,701


63,717

9,206

50,133

4,378

Accrued income

2,673



2,673


2,706



2,706

Assets held for sale9

701



701


1,388



1,388

Other assets5

38,140



38,140


39,295



39,295

Total balance sheet

798,344

210,517

39,293

548,534


789,750

209,869

50,133

529,748

Off-balance sheet6










Undrawn Commitments

182,390

2,940


179,450


168,668

2,951


165,717

Financial Guarantees and
other equivalents

74,414

2,590


71,824


60,410

2,592


57,818

Total off-balance sheet

256,804

5,530

-

251,274


229,078

5,543

-

223,535

Total

1,055,148

216,047

39,293

799,808


1,018,828

215,412

50,133

753,283

1.     An analysis of credit quality is set out in the credit quality analysis section. Further details of collateral held by client segment and stage are set out in the collateral analysis section

2.     Excludes equity and other investments of $992 million (31 December 2022: $808 million). Further details are set out in Note 13 financial instruments

3.     Excludes equity and other investments of $2,940 million (31 December 2022: $3,230 million). Further details are set out in Note 13 financial instruments

4      The Group enters into master netting agreements, which in the event of default result in a single amount owed by or to the counterparty through netting the sum of the positive and negative mark-to-market values of applicable derivative transactions

5.     Other assets include Hong Kong certificates of indebtedness, cash collateral, and acceptances, in addition to unsettled trades and other financial assets

6.     Excludes ECL allowances which are reported under Provisions for liabilities and charges

7.     Collateral capped at maximum exposure (over-collateralised)

8.     Adjusted for over-collateralisation, which has been determined with reference to the drawn and undrawn component as this best reflects the effect on the amount arising from expected credit losses

9.     The amount is after ECL. Further details are set out in Note 21 Assets held for sale and associated liabilities



Page 6

Analysis of financial instruments by stage (audited)

The table below presents the gross and credit impairment balances by stage for the Group's amortised cost and FVOCI financial instruments as at 31 December 2023.


2023

Stage 1


Stage 2


Stage 3


Total

Gross balance1

$million

Total credit impair-ment
$million

Net carrying value
$million

Gross balance1
$million

Total credit impair-ment
$million

Net carrying value
$million

Gross balance1
$million

Total credit impair-ment
$million

Net carrying value
$million

Gross balance1
$million

Total credit impair-ment
$million

Net carrying value
$million

Cash and balances at central banks

69,313

-

69,313


207

(7)

200


404

(12)

392


69,924

(19)

69,905

Loans and advances
to banks (amortised cost)

44,384

(8)

44,376


540

(10)

530


77

(6)

71


45,001

(24)

44,977

Loans and advances to customers (amortised cost)

273,692

(430)

273,262


11,225

(420)

10,805


7,228

(4,320)

2,908


292,145

(5,170)

286,975

Debt securities and other
eligible bills5

158,314

(26)



1,860

(34)



164

(61)



160,338

(121)


Amortised cost

56,787

(16)

56,771


103

(2)

101


120

(57)

63


57,010

(75)

56,935

FVOCI2

101,527

(10)



1,757

(32)



44

(4)



103,328

(46)

-

Accrued income (amortised cost)4

2,673

-

2,673


-

-

-


-

-

-


2,673

-

2,673

Assets held
for sale4

661

(33)

628


76

(4)

72


1

-

1


738

(37)

701

Other assets

38,139

-

38,139


-

-

-


4

(3)

1


38,143

(3)

38,140

Undrawn commitments3

176,654

(52)



5,733

(39)



3

-



182,390

(91)


Financial guarantees,
trade credits
and irrevocable letter of credits3

70,832

(10)



2,910

(14)



672

(112)



74,414

(136)


Total

834,662

(559)



22,551

(528)



8,553

(4,514)



865,766

(5,601)


1      Gross carrying amount for off-balance sheet refers to notional values

2      These instruments are held at fair value on the balance sheet. The ECL provision in respect of debt securities measured at FVOCI is held within the OCI reserve

3      These are off-balance sheet instruments. Only the ECL is recorded on-balance sheet as a financial liability and therefore there is no "net carrying amount". ECL allowances on off-balance sheet instruments are held as liability provisions to the extent that the drawn and undrawn components of loan exposures can be separately identified. Otherwise they will be reported against the drawn component

4      Stage 1 ECL is not material

5      Stage 3 gross includes $80 million (31 December 2022: $28 million) originated credit-impaired debt securities with impairment of $14 million (31 December 2022: $13 million)



Page 7


2022

Stage 1


Stage 2


Stage 3


Total

Gross balance1
$million

Total credit impair-ment
$million

Net carrying value
$million

Gross balance1
$million

Total credit impair-ment
$million

Net carrying value
$million

Gross balance1
$million

Total credit impair-ment
$million

Net carrying value
$million

Gross balance1
$million

Total credit impair-ment
$million

Net carrying value
$million

Cash and balances at central banks

57,643

-

57,643


333

(8)

325


295

-

295


58,271

(8)

58,263

Loans and advances
to banks (amortised cost)

39,149

(9)

39,140


337

(3)

334


59

(14)

45


39,545

(26)

39,519

Loans and advances to customers (amortised cost)

295,219

(559)

294,660


13,043

(444)

12,599


7,845

(4,457)

3,388


316,107

(5,460)

310,647

Debt securities and other eligible bills5

166,103

(25)



5,455

(90)



144

(106)



171,702

(221)


Amortised cost

59,427

(9)

59,418


271

(2)

269


78

(51)

27


59,776

(62)

59,714

FVOCI2

106,676

(16)



5,184

(88)



66

(55)



111,926

(159)


Accrued income (amortised cost)4

2,706

-

2,706


-

-

-


-

-

-


2,706

-

2,706

Assets held
for sale4

1,083

(6)

1,077


262

(4)

258


120

(67)

53


1,465

(77)

1,388

Other assets

39,294

-

39,294


-

-

-


4

(3)

1


39,298

(3)

39,295

Undrawn commitments3

162,958

(41)



5,582

(53)



128

-



168,668

(94)


Financial guarantees,
trade credits
and irrevocable letter of credits3

56,683

(11)



3,062

(28)



665

(147)



60,410

(186)


Total

820,838

(651)



28,074

(630)



9,260

(4,794)



858,172

(6,075)


1      Gross carrying amount for off-balance sheet refers to notional values

2      These instruments are held at fair value on the balance sheet. The ECL provision in respect of debt securities measured at FVOCI is held within the OCI reserve

3      These are off-balance sheet instruments. Only the ECL is recorded on-balance sheet as a financial liability and therefore there is no "net carrying amount". ECL allowances on off-balance sheet instruments are held as liability provisions to the extent that the drawn and undrawn components of loan exposures can be separately identified. Otherwise they will be reported against the drawn component

4      Stage 1 ECL is not material

5      Stage 3 gross includes $28 million originated credit-impaired debt securities with impairment of $13 million



Page 8

Credit quality analysis (audited)

Credit quality by client segment

For CCIB, exposures are analysed by credit grade (CG), which plays a central role in the quality assessment and monitoring of risk. All loans are assigned a CG, which is reviewed periodically and amended in light of changes in the borrower's circumstances or behaviour. CGs 1 to 12 are assigned to stage 1 and stage 2 (performing) clients or accounts, while CGs 13 and 14 are assigned to stage 3 (credit-impaired) clients. Consumer and Business Banking portfolios are analysed by days past due and Private Banking by the type of collateral held.

Mapping of credit quality

The Group uses the following internal risk mapping to determine the credit quality for loans.

Credit quality description

Corporate, Commercial & Institutional Banking


Private Banking1


Consumer & Business Banking5

Internal grade mapping

S&P external ratings
equivalent

Regulatory
PD range (%)

Internal ratings

Internal grade mapping

Strong

1A to 5B

AAA/AA+ to BBB-/BB+²

0 to 0.425


Class I and Class IV


Current loans (no past dues nor impaired)

Satisfactory

6A to 11C

BB+/BB to B-/CCC+³

0.426 to 15.75


Class II and Class III


Loans past due till 29 days

Higher risk

Grade 12

CCC+ to C⁴

15.751 to 99.999


Stressed Assets Group (SAG) managed


Past due loans 30 days and over till 90 days

1      For Private Banking, classes of risk represent the type of collateral held. Class I represents facilities with liquid collateral, such as cash and marketable securities. Class II represents unsecured/partially secured facilities and those with illiquid collateral, such as equity in private enterprises. Class III represents facilities with residential or commercial real estate collateral. Class IV covers margin trading facilities

2      Banks' rating: AAA/AA+ to BB+. Sovereigns' rating: AAA to BB+

3      Banks' rating: BB to "CCC+ to C". Sovereigns' rating: BB+/BB to B-/CCC+

4      Banks' rating: CCC+ to C. Sovereigns' rating: CCC+ to "CCC+ to C"

5      Medium enterprise clients within Business Banking are managed using the same internal credit grades as CCIB

The table below sets out the gross loans and advances held at amortised cost, expected credit loss provisions and expected credit loss coverage by business segment and stage. Expected credit loss coverage represents the expected credit loss reported for each segment and stage as a proportion of the gross loan balance for each segment and stage.



Page 9

Loans and advances by client segment (audited)

Amortised cost

2023

Banks
$million


Customers


Undrawn commitments
$million

Financial Guarantees
$million

Corporate, Commercial & Institutional Banking
$million

Consumer, Private & Business Banking
$million

Ventures
$million

Central &
other items
$million

Customer Total
$million

Stage 1

44,384


120,886

123,486

1,015

28,305

273,692


176,654

70,832

- Strong

35,284


84,248

118,193

1,000

27,967

231,408


162,643

47,885

- Satisfactory

9,100


36,638

5,293

15

338

42,284


14,011

22,947

Stage 2

540


7,902

2,304

54

965

11,225


5,733

2,910

- Strong

55


1,145

1,761

34

-

2,940


1,090

830

- Satisfactory

212


5,840

206

7

-

6,053


4,169

1,823

- Higher risk

273


917

337

13

965

2,232


474

257

Of which (stage 2):











- Less than 30 days past due

-


78

206

7

-

291


-

-

- More than 30 days past due

-


10

337

13

-

360


-

-

Stage 3, credit-impaired
financial assets

77


5,508

1,484

12

224

7,228


3

672

Gross balance¹

45,001


134,296

127,274

1,081

29,494

292,145


182,390

74,414

Stage 1

(8)


(101)

(314)

(15)

-

(430)


(52)

(10)

- Strong

(3)


(34)

(234)

(14)

-

(282)


(31)

(2)

- Satisfactory

(5)


(67)

(80)

(1)

-

(148)


(21)

(8)

Stage 2

(10)


(257)

(141)

(21)

(1)

(420)


(39)

(14)

- Strong

(1)


(18)

(65)

(14)

-

(97)


(5)

-

- Satisfactory

(2)


(179)

(22)

(3)

-

(204)


(23)

(7)

- Higher risk

(7)


(60)

(54)

(4)

(1)

(119)


(11)

(7)

Of which (stage 2):











- Less than 30 days past due

-


(2)

(22)

(3)

-

(27)


-

-

- More than 30 days past due

-


(1)

(54)

(4)

-

(59)


-

-

Stage 3, credit-impaired
financial assets

(6)


(3,533)

(760)

(12)

(15)

(4,320)


-

(112)

Total credit impairment

(24)


(3,891)

(1,215)

(48)

(16)

(5,170)


(91)

(136)

Net carrying value

44,977


130,405

126,059

1,033

29,478

286,975




Stage 1

0.0%


0.1%

0.3%

1.5%

0.0%

0.2%


0.0%

0.0%

- Strong

0.0%


0.0%

0.2%

1.4%

0.0%

0.1%


0.0%

0.0%

- Satisfactory

0.1%


0.2%

1.5%

6.7%

0.0%

0.4%


0.1%

0.0%

Stage 2

1.9%


3.3%

6.1%

38.9%

0.1%

3.7%


0.7%

0.5%

- Strong

1.8%


1.6%

3.7%

41.2%

0.0%

3.3%


0.5%

0.0%

- Satisfactory

0.9%


3.1%

10.7%

42.9%

0.0%

3.4%


0.6%

0.4%

- Higher risk

2.6%


6.5%

16.0%

30.8%

0.1%

5.3%


2.3%

2.7%

Of which (stage 2):











- Less than 30 days past due

0.0%


2.6%

10.7%

42.9%

0.0%

9.3%


0.0%

0.0%

- More than 30 days past due

0.0%


10.0%

16.0%

30.8%

0.0%

16.4%


0.0%

0.0%

Stage 3, credit-impaired
financial assets (S3)

7.8%


64.1%

51.2%

100.0%

6.7%

59.8%


0.0%

16.7%

Cover ratio

0.1%


2.9%

1.0%

4.4%

0.1%

1.8%


0.0%

0.2%

Fair value through profit or loss











Performing

32,813


58,465

13

-

-

58,478


-

-

- Strong

28,402


38,014

13

-

-

38,027


-

-

- Satisfactory

4,411


20,388

-

-

-

20,388


-

-

- Higher risk

-


63

-

-

-

63


-

-

Defaulted (CG13-14)

-


33

-

-

-

33


-

-

Gross balance (FVTPL)2

32,813


58,498

13

-

-

58,511


-

-

Net carrying value (incl FVTPL)

77,790


188,903

126,072

1,033

29,478

345,486


-

-

1.     Loans and advances includes reverse repurchase agreements and other similar secured lending of $13,996 million under Customers and of $1,738 million under Banks, held at amortised cost

2.     Loans and advances includes reverse repurchase agreements and other similar secured lending of $51,299 million under Customers and of $30,548 million under Banks, held at fair value through profit or loss

Page 10

 

Amortised cost

2022

Banks
$million


Customers


Undrawn commitments
$million

Financial Guarantees
$million

Corporate, Commercial & Institutional Banking
$million

Consumer, Private & Business Banking
$million

Ventures
$million

Central &
other items
$million

Customer Total
$million

Stage 1

39,149


126,261

129,134

691

39,133

295,219


162,958

56,683

- Strong

27,941


89,567

124,734

685

39,133

254,119


148,303

39,612

- Satisfactory

11,208


36,694

4,400

6

-

41,100


14,655

17,071

Stage 2

337


11,355

1,670

18

-

13,043


5,582

3,062

- Strong

148


2,068

1,215

10

-

3,293


1,449

522

- Satisfactory

119


7,783

146

4

-

7,933


3,454

2,134

- Higher risk

70


1,504

309

4

-

1,817


679

406

Of which (stage 2):











- Less than 30 days past due

5


109

148

4

-

261


-

-

- More than 30 days past due

6


23

310

4

-

337


-

-

Stage 3, credit-impaired
financial assets

59


6,143

1,453

1

248

7,845


128

665

Gross balance1

39,545


143,759

132,257

710

39,381

316,107


168,668

60,410

Stage 1

(9)


(143)

(406)

(10)

-

(559)


(41)

(11)

- Strong

(3)


(43)

(332)

(10)

-

(385)


(28)

(3)

- Satisfactory

(6)


(100)

(74)

-

-

(174)


(13)

(8)

Stage 2

(3)


(323)

(120)

(1)

-

(444)


(53)

(28)

- Strong

-


(30)

(62)

(1)

-

(93)


(6)

-

- Satisfactory

(2)


(159)

(17)

-

-

(176)


(42)

(15)

- Higher risk

(1)


(134)

(41)

-

-

(175)


(5)

(13)

Of which (stage 2):











- Less than 30 days past due

-


(2)

(17)

-

-

(19)


-

-

- More than 30 days past due

-


(1)

(41)

-

-

(42)


-

-

Stage 3, credit-impaired
financial assets

(14)


(3,662)

(776)

(1)

(18)

(4,457)


-

(147)

Total credit impairment

(26)


(4,128)

(1,302)

(12)

(18)

(5,460)


(94)

(186)

Net carrying value

39,519


139,631

130,955

698

39,363

310,647




Stage 1

0.0%


0.1%

0.3%

1.4%

0.0%

0.2%


0.0%

0.0%

- Strong

0.0%


0.0%

0.3%

1.5%

0.0%

0.2%


0.0%

0.0%

- Satisfactory

0.1%


0.3%

1.7%

0.0%

0.0%

0.4%


0.1%

0.0%

Stage 2

0.9%


2.8%

7.2%

5.6%

0.0%

3.4%


0.9%

0.9%

- Strong

0.0%


1.5%

5.1%

10.0%

0.0%

2.8%


0.4%

0.0%

- Satisfactory

1.7%


2.0%

11.6%

0.0%

0.0%

2.2%


1.2%

0.7%

- Higher risk

1.4%


8.9%

13.3%

0.0%

0.0%

9.6%


0.7%

3.2%

Of which (stage 2):











- Less than 30 days past due

0.0%


1.8%

11.5%

0.0%

0.0%

7.3%


0.0%

0.0%

- More than 30 days past due

0.0%


4.3%

13.2%

0.0%

0.0%

12.5%


0.0%

0.0%

Stage 3, credit-impaired
financial assets (S3)

23.7%


59.6%

53.4%

100.0%

7.3%

56.8%


0.0%

22.1%

Cover ratio

0.1%


2.9%

1.0%

1.7%

0.0%

1.7%


0.1%

0.3%

Fair value through profit or loss











Performing

24,930


44,461

28

-

2,557

47,046


-

-

- Strong

21,451


36,454

27

-

2,409

38,890


-

-

- Satisfactory

3,479


8,007

1

-

148

8,156


-

-

- Higher risk

-


-

-

-

-

-


-

-

Defaulted (CG13-14)

-


37

-

-

-

37


-

-

Gross balance (FVTPL)2

24,930


44,498

28

-

2,557

47,083


-

-

Net carrying value (incl FVTPL)

64,449


184,129

130,983

698

41,920

357,730


-

-

1.     Loans and advances includes reverse repurchase agreements and other similar secured lending of $24,498 million under Customers and of $978 million under Banks, held at amortised cost

2.     Loans and advances includes reverse repurchase agreements and other similar secured lending of $40,537 million under Customers and of $23,954 million under Banks, held at fair value through profit or loss



Page 11

Loans and advances by client segment credit quality analysis

Credit grade

Regulatory 1 year
PD range (%)

S&P external ratings equivalent

Corporate, Commercial & Institutional Banking

2023

Gross


Credit impairment

Stage 1
$million

Stage 2
$million

Stage 3
$million

Total
$million

Stage 1
$million

Stage 2
$million

Stage 3
$million

Total
$million

Strong



84,248

1,145

-

85,893


 (34)

 (18)

-

 (52)

1A-2B

0 - 0.045

A+ and above

10,891

81

-

10,972


 (1)

-

-

 (1)

3A-4A

0.046 - 0.110

A/A- to BBB+/BBB

31,974

558

-

 32,532


 (3)

-

-

 (3)

4B-5B

0.111 - 0.425

BBB to BBB-/BB+

 41,383

506

-

 41,889


 (30)

 (18)

-

 (48)

Satisfactory



 36,638

5,840

-

 42,478


 (67)

 (179)

-

 (246)

6A-7B

0.426 - 1.350

BB+/BB to BB-

 24,296

 1,873

-

26,169


 (38)

 (77)

-

 (115)

8A-9B

1.351 - 4.000

BB-/B+ to B

8,196

2,273

-

10,469


 (13)

 (90)

-

 (103)

10A-11C

4.001 - 15.75

B/B- to B-/CCC+

4,146

1,694

-

 5,840


 (16)

 (12)

-

 (28)

Higher risk



-

917

-

917


-

 (60)

-

 (60)

12

15.751 - 99.999

CCC+/C

-

917

-

917


-

 (60)

-

 (60)

Defaulted



-

-

 5,508

 5,508


-

-

(3,533)

(3,533)

13-14

100

Defaulted

-

-

 5,508

 5,508


-

-

(3,533)

(3,533)

Total



120,886

7,902

5,508

134,296


 (101)

 (257)

(3,533)

 (3,891)

 

Credit grade

Regulatory 1 year
PD range (%)

S&P external ratings equivalent

Corporate, Commercial & Institutional Banking

2022

Gross


Credit impairment

Stage 1
$million

Stage 2
$million

Stage 3
$million

Total
$million

Stage 1
$million

Stage 2
$million

Stage 3
$million

Total
$million

Strong



89,567

2,068

-

91,635


(43)

(30)

-

(73)

1A-2B

0 - 0.045

A+ and above

8,247

117

-

8,364


(4)

-

-

(4)

3A-4A

0.046 - 0.110

A/A- to BBB+/BBB

36,379

321

-

36,700


(5)

-

-

(5)

4B-5B

0.111 - 0.425

BBB to BBB-/BB+

44,941

1,630

-

46,571


(34)

(30)

-

(64)

Satisfactory



36,694

7,783

-

44,477


(100)

(159)

-

(259)

6A-7B

0.426 - 1.350

BB+/BB to BB-

23,196

2,684

-

25,880


(67)

(94)

-

(161)

8A-9B

1.351 - 4.000

BB-/B+ to B

9,979

3,116

-

13,095


(20)

(35)

-

(55)

10A-11C

4.001 - 15.75

B/B- to B-/CCC+

3,519

1,983

-

5,502


(13)

(30)

-

(43)

Higher risk



-

1,504

-

1,504


-

(134)

-

(134)

12

15.751 - 99.999

CCC+/C

-

1,504

-

1,504


-

(134)

-

(134)

Defaulted



-

-

6,143

6,143


-

-

(3,662)

(3,662)

13-14

100

Defaulted

-

-

6,143

6,143


-

-

(3,662)

(3,662)

Total



126,261

11,355

6,143

143,759


(143)

(323)

(3,662)

(4,128)

 

Credit grade

Regulatory 1 year
PD range (%)

S&P external ratings equivalent

Corporate lending¹  - Asia

2023

Gross


Credit impairment

Stage 1
$million

Stage 2
$million

Stage 3
$million

Total
$million

Stage 1
$million

Stage 2
$million

Stage 3
$million

Total
$million

Strong



 36,959

 802

-

 37,761


 (12)

 (15)

-

 (27)

1A-2B

0 - 0.045

A+ and above

 3,550

 24

-

 3,574


-

-

-

-

3A-4A

0.046 - 0.110

A/A- to BBB+/BBB

 12,634

 400

-

 13,034


 (1)

-

-

 (1)

4B-5B

0.111 - 0.425

BBB to BBB-/BB+

 20,775

 378

-

 21,153


 (11)

 (15)

-

 (26)

Satisfactory



 22,581

 2,534

-

 25,115


 (35)

 (137)

-

 (172)

6A-7B

0.426 - 1.350

BB+/BB to BB-

 14,740

 739

-

 15,479


 (28)

 (68)

-

 (96)

8A-9B

1.351 - 4.000

BB-/B+ to B

 5,243

 1,134

-

 6,377


 (5)

 (66)

-

 (71)

10A-11C

4.001 - 15.75

B/B- to B-/CCC+

 2,598

 661

-

 3,259


 (2)

 (3)

-

 (5)

Higher risk



-

 231

-

 231


-

 (19)

-

 (19)

12

15.751 - 99.999

CCC+/C

-

 231

-

 231


-

 (19)

-

 (19)

Defaulted



-

-

 2,870

 2,870


-

-

(2,014)

(2,014)

13-14

100

Defaulted

-

-

2,870

2,870


-

-

(2,014)

(2,014)

Total



 59,540

3,567

 2,870

 65,977


 (47)

 (171)

(2,014)

 (2,232)



 

1          Corporate loans and advances to customers excludes loans to "Financing, insurance and non-banking" and "Government" counterparties

Page 12

 




Corporate lending1 - Asia

2022

Gross


Credit impairment

Stage 1
$million

Stage 2
$million

Stage 3
$million

Total
$million

Stage 1
$million

Stage 2
$million

Stage 3
$million

Total
$million

Strong



40,402

1,361

-

41,763


(28)

(21)

-

(49)

1A-2B

0 - 0.045

A+ and above

3,857

52

-

3,909


(3)

-

-

(3)

3A-4A

0.046 - 0.110

A/A- to BBB+/BBB

14,694

250

-

14,944


(2)

(1)

-

(3)

4B-5B

0.111 - 0.425

BBB to BBB-/BB+

21,851

1,059

-

22,910


(23)

(20)

-

(43)

Satisfactory



22,064

3,859

-

25,923


(55)

(99)

-

(154)

6A-7B

0.426 - 1.350

BB+/BB to BB-

14,512

1,285

-

15,797


(47)

(81)

-

(128)

8A-9B

1.351 - 4.000

BB-/B+ to B

5,091

1,451

-

6,542


(7)

(7)

-

(14)

10A-11C

4.001 - 15.75

B/B- to B-/CCC+

2,461

1,123

-

3,584


(1)

(11)

-

(12)

Higher risk



-

463

-

463


-

(106)

-

(106)

12

15.751 - 99.999

CCC+/C

-

463

-

463


-

(106)

-

(106)

Defaulted



-

-

3,063

3,063


-

-

(1,748)

(1,748)

13-14

100

Defaulted

-

-

3,063

3,063


-

-

(1,748)

(1,748)

Total



62,466

5,683

3,063

71,212


(83)

(226)

(1,748)

(2,057)

1      Corporate loans and advances to customers excludes loans to "Financing, insurance and non-banking" and "Government" counterparties

Credit grade

Regulatory 1 year
PD range (%)

S&P external ratings equivalent

Corporate lending1 - Africa & Middle East

2023

Gross


Credit impairment

Stage 1
$million

Stage 2
$million

Stage 3
$million

Total
$million

Stage 1
$million

Stage 2
$million

Stage 3
$million

Total
$million

Strong



7,756

 43

-

 7,799


(1)

 (2)

-

 (3)

1A-2B

0 - 0.045

A+ and above

 358

-

-

 358


-

-

-

-

3A-4A

0.046 - 0.110

A/A- to BBB+/BBB

 1,952

-

-

 1,952


-

-

-

-

4B-5B

0.111 - 0.425

BBB to BBB-/BB+

5,446

 43

-

5,489


(1)

 (2)

-

 (3)

Satisfactory



 2,801

 492

-

 3,293


 (18)

 (13)

-

 (31)

6A-7B

0.426 - 1.350

BB+/BB to BB-

 1,512

 82

-

 1,594


 (2)

 (3)

-

 (5)

8A-9B

1.351 - 4.000

BB-/B+ to B

 587

175

-

 762


 (4)

 (7)

-

 (11)

10A-11C

4.001 - 15.75

B/B- to B-/CCC+

 702

235

-

937


 (12)

 (3)

-

 (15)

Higher risk



-

 515

-

 515


-

 (37)

-

 (37)

12

15.751 - 99.999

CCC+/C

-

 515

-

 515


-

 (37)

-

 (37)

Defaulted



-

-

 1,435

 1,435


-

-

 (1,079)

(1,079)

13-14

100

Defaulted

-

-

 1,435

 1,435


-

-

 (1,079)

(1,079)

Total



 10,557

 1,050

 1,435

 13,042


 (19)

 (52)

 (1,079)

 (1,150)

1      Corporate loans and advances to customers excludes loans to "Financing, insurance and non-banking" and "Government" counterparties

Credit grade

Regulatory 1 year
PD range (%)

S&P external ratings equivalent

Corporate lending1 - Africa & Middle East

2022

Gross


Credit impairment

Stage 1
$million

Stage 2
$million

Stage 3
$million

Total
$million

Stage 1
$million

Stage 2
$million

Stage 3
$million

Total
$million

Strong



6,268

311

-

6,579


-

-

-

-

1A-2B

0 - 0.045

A+ and above

338

6

-

344


-

-

-

-

3A-4A

0.046 - 0.110

A/A- to BBB+/BBB

2,049

23

-

2,072


-

-

-

-

4B-5B

0.111 - 0.425

BBB to BBB-/BB+

3,881

282

-

4,163


-

-

-

-

Satisfactory



4,389

642

-

5,031


(32)

(41)

-

(73)

6A-7B

0.426 - 1.350

BB+/BB to BB-

1,454

218

-

1,672


(11)

(3)

-

(14)

8A-9B

1.351 - 4.000

BB-/B+ to B

2,361

320

-

2,681


(11)

(24)

-

(35)

10A-11C

4.001 - 15.75

B/B- to B-/CCC+

574

104

-

678


(10)

(14)

-

(24)

Higher risk



-

653

-

653


-

(26)

-

(26)

12

15.751 - 99.999

CCC+/C

-

653

-

653


-

(26)

-

(26)

Defaulted



-

-

1,735

1,735


-

-

(1,344)

(1,344)

13-14

100

Defaulted

-

-

1,735

1,735


-

-

(1,344)

(1,344)

Total



10,657

1,606

1,735

13,998


(32)

(67)

(1,344)

(1,443)

1      Corporate loans and advances to customers excludes loans to "Financing, insurance and non-banking" and "Government" counterparties



Page 13

 

Credit grade

Regulatory 1 year
PD range (%)

S&P external ratings equivalent

Corporate lending1 - Europe &Americas

2023

Gross


Credit impairment

Stage 1
$million

Stage 2
$million

Stage 3
$million

Total
$million

Stage 1
$million

Stage 2
$million

Stage 3
$million

Total
$million

Strong



9,283

 198

-

 9,481


 (11)

-

-

 (11)

1A-2B

0 - 0.045

A+ and above

 528

-

-

 528


-

-

-

-

3A-4A

0.046 - 0.110

A/A- to BBB+/BBB

 4,413

 124

-

 4,537


 (1)

-

-

 (1)

4B-5B

0.111 - 0.425

BBB to BBB-/BB+

4,342

 74

-

4,416


 (10)

-

-

 (10)

Satisfactory



 4,778

1,621

-

6,399


 (5)

 (22)

-

 (27)

6A-7B

0.426 - 1.350

BB+/BB to BB-

 3,912

768

-

 4,680


 (4)

 (2)

-

 (6)

8A-9B

1.351 - 4.000

BB-/B+ to B

 596

821

-

 1,417


 (1)

 (15)

-

 (16)

10A-11C

4.001 - 15.75

B/B- to B-/CCC+

 270

 32

-

 302


-

 (5)

-

 (5)

Higher risk



-

 77

-

 77


-

 (7)

-

 (7)

12

15.751 - 99.999

CCC+/C

-

 77

-

 77


-

 (7)

-

 (7)

Defaulted



-

-

 980

980


-

-

 (345)

 (345)

13-14

100

Defaulted

-

-

980

980


-

-

 (345)

 (345)

Total



 14,061

 1,896

980

 16,937


 (16)

 (29)

 (345)

 (390)

1      Corporate loans and advances to customers excludes loans to "Financing, insurance and non-banking" and "Government" counterparties

Credit grade

Regulatory 1 year
PD range (%)

S&P external ratings equivalent

Corporate lending1 - Europe & Americas

2022

Gross


Credit impairment

Stage 1
$million

Stage 2
$million

Stage 3
$million

Total
$million

Stage 1
$million

Stage 2
$million

Stage 3
$million

Total
$million

Strong



10,033

225

-

10,258


(13)

-

-

(13)

1A-2B

0 - 0.045

A+ and above

575

-

-

575


-

-

-

-

3A-4A

0.046 - 0.110

A/A- to BBB+/BBB

4,065

8

-

4,073


(1)

-

-

(1)

4B-5B

0.111 - 0.425

BBB to BBB-/BB+

5,393

217

-

5,610


(12)

-

-

(12)

Satisfactory



4,498

2,077

-

6,575


(4)

(25)

-

(29)

6A-7B

0.426 - 1.350

BB+/BB to BB-

3,867

1,376

-

5,243


(4)

(25)

-

(29)

8A-9B

1.351 - 4.000

BB-/B+ to B

537

636

-

1,173


-

-

-

-

10A-11C

4.001 - 15.75

B/B- to B-/CCC+

94

65

-

159


-

-

-

-

Higher risk



-

387

-

387


-

(1)

-

(1)

12

15.751 - 99.999

CCC+/C

-

387

-

387


-

(1)

-

(1)

Defaulted



-

-

1,230

1,230


-

-

(398)

(398)

13-14

100

Defaulted

-

-

1,230

1,230


-

-

(398)

(398)

Total



14,531

2,689

1,230

18,450


(17)

(26)

(398)

(441)

1      Corporate loans and advances to customers excludes loans to "Financing, insurance and non-banking" and "Government" counterparties



Page 14

 


Consumer, Private & Business Banking

2023

Asia


Africa & Middle East


Europe & Americas

Total
$million

Mort-gages
$million

Credit Cards
$million

Others
$million

Total
$million

Mort-gages
$million

Credit Cards
$million

Others
$million

Total
$million

Mort-gages
$million

Credit Cards
$million

Others
$million

Total
$million

Stage 1
















Gross
















Strong

77,270

6,234

30,027

113,531


974

263

2,471

3,708


335

-

619

954

118,193

Satisfactory

659

113

2,418

3,190


158

11

121

290


1,812

-

1

1,813

5,293

Total

77,929

6,347

32,445

116,721


1,132

274

2,592

3,998


2,147

-

620

2,767

123,486

ECL
















Strong

(5)

(25)

(181)

(211)


(2)

(7)

(13)

(22)


-

-

(1)

(1)

(234)

Satisfactory

-

(57)

(19)

(76)


-

-

(2)

(2)


(2)

-

-

(2)

(80)

Total

(5)

(82)

(200)

(287)


(2)

(7)

(15)

(24)


(2)

-

(1)

(3)

(314)

Coverage %

0%

1%

1%

0%


0%

3%

1%

1%


0%

0%

0%

0%

0%

Stage 2
















Gross
















Strong

1,014

124

583

1,721


17

8

15

40


-

-

-

-

1,761

Satisfactory

122

14

29

165


4

1

9

14


27

-

-

27

206

Higher risk

161

39

118

318


5

3

11

19


-

-

-

-

337

Total

1,297

177

730

2,204


26

12

35

73


27

-

-

27

2,304

ECL
















Strong

(1)

(12)

(43)

(56)


(1)

(1)

(7)

(9)


-

-

-

-

(65)

Satisfactory

-

(14)

(7)

(21)


-

-

(1)

(1)


-

-

-

-

(22)

Higher risk

(1)

(17)

(34)

(52)


-

(1)

(1)

(2)


-

-

-

-

(54)

Total

(2)

(43)

(84)

(129)


(1)

(2)

(9)

(12)


-

-

-

-

(141)

Coverage %

0%

24%

12%

6%


4%

17%

26%

16%


0%

0%

0%

0%

6%

Stage 3
















Gross credit impaired

382

53

841

1,276


53

3

59

115


85

-

8

93

1,484

ECL

(84)

(36)

(566)

(686)


(25)

(2)

(33)

(60)


(14)

-

-

(14)

(760)

Coverage %

22%

68%

67%

54%


47%

67%

56%

52%


16%

0%

0%

15%

51%

Total
















Gross
















Strong

78,284

6,358

30,610

115,252


991

271

2,486

3,748


335

-

619

954

119,954

Satisfactory

781

127

2,447

3,355


162

12

130

304


1,839

-

1

1,840

5,499

Higher risk

161

39

118

318


5

3

11

19


-

-

-

-

337

Credit-Impaired

382

53

841

1,276


53

3

59

115


85

-

8

93

1,484

Total

79,608

6,577

34,016

120,201


1,211

289

2,686

4,186


2,259

-

628

2,887

127,274

ECL
















Strong

(6)

(37)

(224)

(267)


(3)

(8)

(20)

(31)


-

-

(1)

(1)

(299)

Satisfactory

-

(71)

(26)

(97)


-

-

(3)

(3)


(2)

-

-

(2)

(102)

Higher risk

(1)

(17)

(34)

(52)


-

(1)

(1)

(2)


-

-

-

-

(54)

Credit-Impaired

(84)

(36)

(566)

(686)


(25)

(2)

(33)

(60)


(14)

-

-

(14)

(760)

Total

(91)

(161)

(850)

(1,102)


(28)

(11)

(57)

(96)


(16)

-

(1)

(17)

(1,215)

Coverage %

0%

2%

2%

1%


2%

4%

2%

2%


1%

0%

0%

1%

1%

 

Page 15



 


Consumer, Private & Business Banking

2022

Asia


Africa & Middle East


Europe & Americas

Mort-gages
$million

Credit cards
$million

Others
$million

Total
$million

Mort-gages
$million

Credit cards
$million

Others
$million

Total
$million

Mort-gages
$million

Credit cards
$million

Others
$million

Total
$million

Total
$million

Stage 1
















Gross
















Strong

81,738

5,781

32,297

119,816


1,004

281

2,590

3,875


397

-

646

1,043

124,734

Satisfactory

1,155

145

1,378

2,678


189

9

71

269


1,372

-

81

1,453

4,400

Total

82,893

5,926

33,675

122,494


1,193

290

2,661

4,144


1,769

-

727

2,496

129,134

ECL
















Strong

-

(49)

(233)

(282)


(3)

(6)

(37)

(46)


(2)

-

(2)

(4)

(332)

Satisfactory

(6)

(37)

(27)

(70)


(1)

-

(1)

(2)


(2)

-

-

(2)

(74)

Total

(6)

(86)

(260)

(352)


(4)

(6)

(38)

(48)


(4)

-

(2)

(6)

(406)

Coverage %

0%

1%

1%

0%


0%

2%

1%

1%


0%

0%

0%

0%

0%

Stage 2
















Gross
















Strong

576

88

388

1,052


112

2

46

160


1

-

2

3

1,215

Satisfactory

75

10

14

99


43

1

3

47


-

-

-

-

146

Higher risk

150

34

63

247


12

3

13

28


34

-

-

34

309

Total

801

132

465

1,398


167

6

62

235


35

-

2

37

1,670

ECL
















Strong

(2)

(26)

(27)

(55)


(3)

(1)

(3)

(7)


-

-

-

-

(62)

Satisfactory

(1)

(9)

(7)

(17)


-

-

-

-


-

-

-

-

(17)

Higher risk

(2)

(6)

(28)

(36)


-

(1)

(4)

(5)


-

-

-

-

(41)

Total

(5)

(41)

(62)

(108)


(3)

(2)

(7)

(12)


-

-

-

-

(120)

Coverage %

1%

31%

13%

8%


2%

33%

11%

5%


0%

0%

0%

0%

7%

Stage 3
















Gross credit impaired

368

48

783

1,199


111

10

56

177


77

-

-

77

1,453

ECL

(97)

(35)

(524)

(656)


(76)

(7)

(30)

(113)


(7)

-

-

(7)

(776)

Coverage %

26%

73%

67%

55%


68%

70%

54%

64%


9%

0%

0%

9%

53%

Total
















Gross
















Strong

82,314

5,869

32,685

120,868


1,116

283

2,636

4,035


398

-

648

1,046

125,949

Satisfactory

1,230

155

1,392

2,777


232

10

74

316


1,372

-

81

1,453

4,546

Higher risk

150

34

63

247


12

3

13

28


34

-

-

34

309

Credit-Impaired

368

48

783

1,199


111

10

56

177


77

-

-

77

1,453

Total

84,062

6,106

34,923

125,091


1,471

306

2,779

4,556


1,881

-

729

2,610

132,257

ECL
















Strong

(2)

(75)

(260)

(337)


(6)

(7)

(40)

(53)


(2)

-

(2)

(4)

(394)

Satisfactory

(7)

(46)

(34)

(87)


(1)

-

(1)

(2)


(2)

-

-

(2)

(91)

Higher risk

(2)

(6)

(28)

(36)


-

(1)

(4)

(5)


-

-

-

-

(41)

Credit-Impaired

(97)

(35)

(524)

(656)


(76)

(7)

(30)

(113)


(7)

-

-

(7)

(776)

Total

(108)

(162)

(846)

(1,116)


(83)

(15)

(75)

(173)


(11)

-

(2)

(13)

(1,302)

Coverage %

0%

3%

2%

1%


6%

5%

3%

4%


1%

0%

0%

0%

1%

 

Page 16

Credit quality by geographic region

The following table sets out the credit quality for gross loans and advances to customers and banks, held at amortised cost, by geographic region and stage.

Loans and advances to customers

Amortised cost

2023


2022

Asia
$million

Africa & Middle East
$million

Europe & Americas
$million

Total
$million

Asia
$million

Africa & Middle East
$million

Europe & Americas
$million

Total
$million

Gross (stage 1)

229,289

17,536

26,867

273,692


248,625

17,553

29,041

295,219

Provision (stage 1)

(363)

(39)

(28)

(430)


(454)

(73)

(32)

(559)

Gross (stage 2)

6,660

3,276

1,289

11,225


8,302

3,122

1,619

13,043

Provision (stage 2)

(321)

(70)

(29)

(420)


(337)

(104)

(3)

(444)

Gross (stage 3)

4,604

2,273

351

7,228


4,562

2,725

558

7,845

Provision (stage 3)

(2,734)

(1,387)

(199)

(4,320)


(2,483)

(1,765)

(209)

(4,457)

Net loans1

237,135

21,589

28,251

286,975


258,215

21,458

30,974

310,647

1      Includes reverse repurchase agreements and other similar secured lending

Loans and advances to banks

Amortised cost

2023


2022

Asia
$million

Africa & Middle East
$million

Europe & Americas
$million

Total
$million

Asia
$million

Africa & Middle East
$million

Europe & Americas
$million

Total
$million

Gross (stage 1)

35,338

2,803

6,243

44,384


21,806

3,818

13,525

39,149

Provision (stage 1)

(7)

-

(1)

(8)


(3)

(4)

(2)

(9)

Gross (stage 2)

17

311

212

540


212

116

9

337

Provision (stage 2)

(2)

(8)

-

(10)


(2)

(1)

-

(3)

Gross (stage 3)

73

-

4

77


59

-

-

59

Provision (stage 3)

(2)

-

(4)

(6)


(14)

-

-

(14)

Net loans1

35,417

3,106

6,454

44,977


22,058

3,929

13,532

39,519

1      Includes reverse repurchase agreements and other similar secured lending

Movement in gross exposures and credit impairment for loans and advances, debt securities, undrawn commitments and financial guarantees (audited)

The tables overleaf set out the movement in gross exposures and credit impairment by stage in respect of amortised cost loans to banks and customers, undrawn commitments, financial guarantees and debt securities classified at amortised cost and FVOCI. The tables are presented for the Group, debt securities and other eligible bills.

Methodology

The movement lines within the tables are an aggregation of monthly movements over the year and will therefore reflect the accumulation of multiple trades during the year. The credit impairment charge in the income statement comprises the amounts within the boxes in the table below, less recoveries of amounts previously written off. Discount unwind is reported in net interest income and related to stage 3 financial instruments only.

The approach for determining the key line items in the tables is set out below.

Transfers - transfers between stages are deemed to occur at the beginning of a month based on prior month closing balances.

Net remeasurement from stage changes - the remeasurement of credit impairment provisions arising from a change in stage is reported within the stage that the assets are transferred to. For example, assets transferred into stage 2 are remeasured from a 12-month to a lifetime expected credit loss, with the effect of remeasurement reported in stage 2. For stage 3, this represents the initial remeasurement from specific provisions recognised on individual assets transferred into stage 3 in the year.



Page 17

Net changes in exposures - new business written less repayments in the year. Within stage 1, new business written will attract up to 12 months of expected credit loss charges. Repayments of non-amortising loans (primarily within CCIB) will have low amounts of expected credit loss provisions attributed to them, due to the release of provisions over the term to maturity. In stages 2 and 3, the net change in exposures reflect repayments although stage 2 may include new facilities where clients are on non-purely precautionary early alert, are CG 12, or when non-investment grade debt securities are acquired.

Changes in risk parameters - for stages 1 and 2, this reflects changes in the probability of default (PD), loss given default (LGD) and exposure at default (EAD) of assets during the year, which includes the impact of releasing provisions over the term to maturity. It also includes the effect of changes in forecasts of macroeconomic variables during the year. In stage 3, this line represents additional specific provisions recognised on exposures held within stage 3.

Interest due but not paid - change in contractual amount of interest due in stage 3 financial instruments but not paid, being the net of accruals, repayments and write-offs, together with the corresponding change in credit impairment.

Changes to ECL models, which incorporate changes to model approaches and methodologies, are not reported as a separate line item as these have an impact over a number of lines and stages.

Movements during the year

Stage 1 gross exposures increased by $3.8 billion to $724 billion (31 December 2022: $720 billion). CCIB exposure increased by $21.8 billion to $337 billion (31 December 2022: $315 billion) due to off-balance sheet exposures, which was partly offset by a decrease in loans and advances to customers. CPBB decreased by $2.2 billion to $191 billion (31 December 2022: $193 billion) which was largely driven by the mortgage portfolio in Korea and Hong Kong. Stage 1 debt securities decreased by $7.8 billion to $158 billion (31 December 2022: $166 billion) due to liquidity management and maturities.

Total stage 1 provisions decreased by $119 million to $526 million (31 December 2022: $645 million). CCIB provisions decreased by $43 million to $151 million (31 December 2022: $194 million), primarily due to new originations, which was partly offset by model updates. Debt securities provisions was stable at $26 million (31 December 2022: $25 million). CPBB decreased by $88 million to $325 million (31 December 2022: $413 million), mainly driven by the release of the judgemental non-linearity post model adjustment and overlay releases, both of which are reported in 'Changes in risk parameters'.

Stage 2 gross exposures decreased by $5.2 billion to $22 billion (31 December 2022: $27 billion), primarily driven by a net reduction in exposures in CCIB, particularly in the CRE and Transport sectors. CPBB exposures increased by $0.7 billion to $2.5 billion (31 December 2022: $1.8 billion), of which $0.4 billion was from the Secured portfolio. Debt securities decreased by $3.6 billion to $1.9 billion (31 December 2022: $5.5 billion).

Stage 2 provisions decreased by $101 million to $517 million (31 December 2022: $618 million). CCIB provisions decreased by $93 million to $318 million (31 December 2022: $411 million) from releases due to exposure reductions, transfers to stage 3 for China CRE exposures and model updates. This was partly offset by a further downgrade of Pakistan sovereign clients within stage 2. CPBB provisions increased by $22 million to $140 million (31 December 2022: $118 million) due to higher delinquencies. This was partly offset by the release of judgemental non-linearity post model adjustment and overlay releases which are reported within 'Changes in risk parameters' due to underlying factors not being valid any more. Debt Securities decreased by $56 million to $34 million (31 December 2022: $90 million) largely due to exposure reductions and shortening of tenors, particularly in Pakistan.

The impact of model and methodology updates in 2023 reduced stage 1 and 2 provisions by $15 million, of which $10 million was in CCIB and Central and other items, while $5 million was in CPBB.

Stage 3 gross loans for CCIB decreased by $0.7 billion to $6.3 billion (31 December 2022: $7 billion) as repayments and write-offs were partly offset by the downgrade of China CRE clients. CCIB provisions decreased by $171 million to $3.7 billion (31 December 2022: $3.8 billion) as charges from new downgrades were offset by releases due to repayments and write-offs. CPBB stage 3 loans was stable at $1.5 billion (31 December 2022: $1.5 billion) but provisions decreased by $17 million to $0.8 billion (31 December 2022: $0.8 billion). Debt security gross assets increased by $20 million to $164 million (31 December 2022: $144 million). 



Page 18

All segments (audited)

Amortised cost
and FVOCI

Stage 1


Stage 2


Stage 35


Total

Gross balance3
$million

Total credit impair-ment
$million

Net
$million

Gross balance3
$million

Total credit impair-ment
$million

Net
$million

Gross balance3
$million

Total credit impair-ment
$million

Net
$million

Gross balance3
$million

Total credit impair-ment
$million

Net
$million

As at 1 January 2022

684,759

(609)

684,150


34,550

(652)

33,898


9,061

(4,941)

4,120


728,370

(6,202)

722,168

Transfers to stage 1

24,666

(555)

24,111


(24,633)

555

(24,078)


(33)

-

(33)


-

-

-

Transfers to stage 2

(46,960)

228

(46,732)


47,479

(246)

47,233


(519)

18

(501)


-

-

-

Transfers to stage 3

(176)

74

(102)


(3,630)

253

(3,377)


3,806

(327)

3,479


-

-

-

Net change in exposures

83,204

(137)

83,067


(24,324)

93

(24,231)


(1,710)

338

(1,372)


57,170

294

57,464

Net remeasurement from stage changes

-

45

45


-

(126)

(126)


-

(168)

(168)


-

(249)

(249)

Changes in risk parameters

-

106

106


-

(387)

(387)


-

(895)

(895)


-

(1,176)

(1,176)

Write-offs

-

-

-


-

-

-


(949)

949

-


(949)

949

-

Interest due
but unpaid

-

-

-


-

-

-


(157)

157

-


(157)

157

-

Discount unwind

-

-

-


-

-

-


-

136

136


-

136

136

Exchange translation differences and
other movements¹

(25,381)

203

(25,178)


(1,963)

(108)

(2,071)


(658)

9

(649)


(28,002)

104

(27,898)

As at 31 December 2022²

720,112

(645)

719,467


27,479

(618)

26,861


8,841

(4,724)

4,117


756,432

(5,987)

750,445

Income statement ECL (charge)/release


14




(420)




(725)




(1,131)


Recoveries of amounts previously written off


-




-




293




293


Total credit impairment (charge)/release


14




(420)




(432)




(838)


As at 1 January 2023

720,112

(645)

719,467


27,479

(618)

26,861


8,841

(4,724)

4,117


756,432

(5,987)

750,445

Transfers to stage 1

19,594

(661)

18,933


(19,583)

661

(18,922)


(11)

-

(11)


-

-

-

Transfers to stage 2

(42,628)

174

(42,454)


42,793

(182)

42,611


(165)

8

(157)


-

-

-

Transfers to stage 3

(96)

6

(90)


(2,329)

326

(2,003)


2,425

(332)

2,093


-

-

-

Net change in exposures

23,717

(185)

23,532


(22,727)

22

(22,705)


(1,708)

624

(1,084)


(718)

461

(257)

Net remeasurement from stage changes

-

52

52


-

(199)

(199)


-

(163)

(163)


-

(310)

(310)

Changes in risk parameters

-

202

202


-

(32)

(32)


-

(1,100)

(1,100)


-

(930)

(930)

Write-offs

-

-

-


-

-

-


(1,027)

1,027

-


(1,027)

1,027

-

Interest due
but unpaid

-

-

-


-

-

-


(83)

83

-


(83)

83

-

Discount unwind

-

-

-


-

-

-


-

180

180


-

180

180

Exchange translation differences and
other movements¹

3,177

531

3,708


(3,365)

(495)

(3,860)


(128)

(102)

(230)


(316)

(66)

(382)

As at 31 December 2023²

723,876

(526)

723,350


22,268

(517)

21,751


8,144

(4,499)

3,645


754,288

(5,542)

748,746

Income statement ECL (charge)/release⁶


69




(209)




(639)




(779)


Recoveries of amounts previously written off


-




-




271




271


Total credit impairment
(charge)/release4


69




(209)




(368)




(508)


1      Includes fair value adjustments and amortisation on debt securities

2      Excludes Cash and balances at central banks, Accrued income, Assets held for sale and Other assets gross balances of $111,478 million (31 December 2022: $101,740 million) and Total credit impairment of $59 million (31 December 2022: $88 million)

3      The gross balance includes the notional amount of off -balance sheet instruments

4      Reported basis

5      Stage 3 includes gross of $80 million (31 December 2022: $28 million) and ECL $14 million (31 December 2022: $13 million) originated credit-impaired debt securities

6      Does not include release relating to Other assets  (31 December 2022: $2 million)

Page 19

Of which - movement of debt securities, alternative tier one and other eligible bills (audited)

Amortised cost
and FVOCI

Stage 1


Stage 2


Stage 32


Total

Gross balance
$million

Total credit impair-ment
$million

Net
$million

Gross balance
$million

Total credit impair-ment
$million

Net
$million

Gross balance
$million

Total credit impair-ment
$million

Net
$million

Gross balance
$million

Total credit impair-ment
$million

Net3
$million

As at 1 January 2022

157,352

(67)

157,285


5,315

(42)

5,273


113

(66)

47


162,780

(175)

162,605

Transfers to stage 1

2,296

(22)

2,274


(2,296)

22

(2,274)


-

-

-


-

-

-

Transfers to stage 2

(3,942)

38

(3,904)


3,942

(38)

3,904


-

-

-


-

-

-

Transfers to stage 3

-

-

-


(66)

42

(24)


66

(42)

24


-

-

-

Net change in exposures

21,613

(44)

21,569


(752)

9

(743)


-

1

1


20,861

(34)

20,827

Net remeasurement from stage changes

-

10

10


-

(2)

(2)


-

(23)

(23)


-

(15)

(15)

Changes in risk parameters

-

38

38


-

(98)

(98)


-

(13)

(13)


-

(73)

(73)

Write-offs

-

-

-


-

-

-


(30)

30

-


(30)

30

-

Interest due
but unpaid

-

-

-


-

-

-


-

-

-


-

-

-

Exchange translation differences and
other movements1

(11,216)

22

(11,194)


(688)

17

(671)


(5)

7

2


(11,909)

46

(11,863)

As at 31 December 2022

166,103

(25)

166,078


5,455

(90)

5,365


144

(106)

38


171,702

(221)

171,481

Income statement ECL (charge)/release


4




(91)




(35)




(122)


Recoveries of amounts previously written off


-




-




-




-


Total credit impairment
(charge)/release


4




(91)




(35)




(122)


As at 1 January 2023

166,103

(25)

166,078


5,455

(90)

5,365


144

(106)

38


171,702

(221)

171,481

Transfers to stage 1

371

(65)

306


(371)

65

(306)


-

-

-


-

-

-

Transfers to stage 2

(884)

14

(870)


884

(14)

870


-

-

-


-

-

-

Transfers to stage 3

-

-

-


(16)

-

(16)


16

-

16


-

-

-

Net change in exposures

(11,583)

(28)

(11,611)


(1,899)

(44)

(1,943)


7

-

7


(13,475)

(72)

(13,547)

Net remeasurement from stage changes

-

7

7


-

(18)

(18)


-

-

-


-

(11)

(11)

Changes in risk parameters

-

32

32


-

105

105


-

(4)

(4)


-

133

133

Write-offs

-

-

-


-

-

-


-

-

-


-

-

-

Interest due
but unpaid

-

-

-


-

-

-


-

-

-


-

-

-

Exchange translation differences and
other movements1

4,307

39

4,346


(2,193)

(38)

(2,231)


(3)

49

46


2,111

50

2,161

As at 31 December 2023

158,314

(26)

158,288


1,860

(34)

1,826


164

(61)

103


160,338

(121)

160,217

Income statement ECL (charge)/release


11




43




(4)




50


Recoveries of amounts previously written off


-




-




-




-


Total credit impairment
(charge)/release


11




43




(4)




50


1      Includes fair value adjustments and amortisation on debt securities

2      Stage 3 includes gross of $80 million (31 December 2022: $28 million) and ECL $14 million (31 December 2022: $13 million) originated credit-impaired debt securities

3      FVOCI instruments are not presented net of ECL. While the presentation is on a net basis for the table, the total net on-balance sheet amount to $160,263 million (31 December 2022: $171,640 million). Refer to the Analysis of financial instrument by stage table



Page 20

Corporate, Commercial & Institutional Banking (audited)

Amortised cost
and FVOCI

Stage 1


Stage 2


Stage 3


Total

Gross balance1
$million

Total credit impair-ment
$million

Net
$million

Gross balance1
$million

Total credit impair-ment
$million

Net
$million

Gross balance1
$million

Total credit impair-ment
$million

Net
$million

Gross balance1
$million

Total credit impair-ment
$million

Net
$million

As at 1 January 2022

313,132

(163)

312,969


25,437

(425)

25,012


7,372

(4,079)

3,293


345,941

(4,667)

341,274

Transfers to stage 1

17,565

(227)

17,338


(17,565)

227

(17,338)


-

-

-


-

-

-

Transfers to stage 2

(37,505)

48

(37,457)


37,944

(66)

37,878


(439)

18

(421)


-

-

-

Transfers to stage 3

(42)

-

(42)


(2,478)

134

(2,344)


2,520

(134)

2,386


-

-

-

Net change in exposures

30,508

(44)

30,464


(21,915)

65

(21,850)


(1,314)

340

(974)


7,279

361

7,640

Net remeasurement from stage changes

-

2

2


-

(42)

(42)


-

(104)

(104)


-

(144)

(144)

Changes in risk parameters

-

21

21


-

(154)

(154)


-

(551)

(551)


-

(684)

(684)

Write-offs

-

-

-


-

-

-


(384)

384

-


(384)

384

-

Interest due
but unpaid

-

-

-


-

-

-


(130)

130

-


(130)

130

-

Discount unwind

-

-

-


-

-

-


-

110

110


-

110

110

Exchange translation differences and
other movements

(8,221)

169

(8,052)


(1,275)

(150)

(1,425)


(631)

64

(567)


(10,127)

83

(10,044)

As at 31 December 2022

315,437

(194)

315,243


20,148

(411)

19,737


6,994

(3,822)

3,172


342,579

(4,427)

338,152

Income statement ECL (charge)/release2


(21)




(131)




(315)




(467)


Recoveries of amounts previously written off


-




-




49




49


Total credit impairment (charge)/release


(21)




(131)




(266)




(418)


As at 1 January 2023

315,437

(194)

315,243


20,148

(411)

19,737


6,994

(3,822)

3,172


342,579

(4,427)

338,152

Transfers to stage 1

14,948

(347)

14,601


(14,948)

347

(14,601)


-

-

-


-

-

-

Transfers to stage 2

(34,133)

80

(34,053)


34,175

(88)

34,087


(42)

8

(34)


-

-

-

Transfers to stage 3

(17)

-

(17)


(1,270)

141

(1,129)


1,287

(141)

1,146


-

-

-

Net change in exposures

41,314

(73)

41,241


(20,084)

89

(19,995)


(1,335)

623

(712)


19,895

639

20,534

Net remeasurement from stage changes

-

15

15


-

(45)

(45)


-

(82)

(82)


-

(112)

(112)

Changes in risk parameters

-

60

60


-

(68)

(68)


-

(668)

(668)


-

(676)

(676)

Write-offs

-

-

-


-

-

-


(340)

340

-


(340)

340

-

Interest due
but unpaid

-

-

-


-

-

-


(120)

120

-


(120)

120

-

Discount unwind

-

-

-


-

-

-


-

155

155


-

155

155

Exchange translation differences and
other movements

(360)

308

(52)


(1,148)

(283)

(1,431)


(188)

(184)

(372)


(1,696)

(159)

(1,855)

As at 31 December 2023

337,189

(151)

337,038


16,873

(318)

16,555


6,256

(3,651)

2,605


360,318

(4,120)

356,198

Income statement ECL (charge)/release2


2




(24)




(127)




(149)


Recoveries of amounts previously written off


-




-




31




31


Total credit impairment
(charge)/release


2




(24)




(96)




(118)


1      The gross balance includes the notional amount of off balance sheet instruments

2      Does not include release relating to Other assets (31 December 2022: $2 million)



Page 21

Consumer, Private and Business Banking (audited)

Amortised cost
and FVOCI

Stage 1


Stage 2


Stage 3


Total

Gross balance¹
$million

Total credit impair-ment
$million

Net
$million

Gross balance¹
$million

Total credit impair-ment
$million

Net
$million

Gross balance¹
$million

Total credit impair-ment
$million

Net
$million

Gross balance¹
$million

Total credit impair-ment
$million

Net
$million

As at 1 January 2022

190,860

(377)

190,483


3,675

(185)

3,490


1,578

(797)

781


196,113

(1,359)

194,754

Transfers to stage 1

4,798

(314)

4,484


(4,765)

314

(4,451)


(33)

-

(33)


-

-

-

Transfers to stage 2

(5,498)

92

(5,406)


5,578

(92)

5,486


(80)

-

(80)


-

-

-

Transfers to stage 3

(81)

-

(81)


(890)

151

(739)


971

(151)

820


-

-

-

Net change in exposures

9,072

(49)

9,023


(1,611)

19

(1,592)


(396)

-

(396)


7,065

(30)

7,035

Net remeasurement from stage changes

-

32

32


-

(82)

(82)


-

(25)

(25)


-

(75)

(75)

Changes in risk parameters

-

63

63


-

(132)

(132)


-

(331)

(331)


-

(400)

(400)

Write-offs

-

-

-


-

-

-


(535)

535

-


(535)

535

-

Interest due
but unpaid

-

-

-


-

-

-


(27)

27

-


(27)

27

-

Discount unwind

-

-

-


-

-

-


-

26

26


-

26

26

Exchange translation differences and
other movements

(5,912)

140

(5,772)


(166)

(111)

(277)


(24)

(60)

(84)


(6,102)

(31)

(6,133)

As at 31 December 2022

193,239

(413)

192,826


1,821

(118)

1,703


1,454

(776)

678


196,514

(1,307)

195,207

Income statement ECL (charge)/release


46




(195)




(356)




(505)


Recoveries of amounts previously written off


-




-




245




245


Total credit impairment
(charge)/release


46




(195)




(111)




(260)


As at 1 January 2023

193,239

(413)

192,826


1,821

(118)

1,703


1,454

(776)

678


196,514

(1,307)

195,207

Transfers to stage 1

4,265

(246)

4,019


(4,254)

246

(4,008)


(11)

-

(11)


-

-

-

Transfers to stage 2

(7,544)

73

(7,471)


7,667

(73)

7,594


(123)

-

(123)


-

-

-

Transfers to stage 3

(64)

1

(63)


(1,049)

187

(862)


1,113

(188)

925


-

-

-

Net change in exposures

1,965

(78)

1,887


(1,713)

14

(1,699)


(395)

-

(395)


(143)

(64)

(207)

Net remeasurement from stage changes

-

31

31


-

(137)

(137)


-

(38)

(38)


-

(144)

(144)

Changes in risk parameters

-

110

110


-

(69)

(69)


-

(426)

(426)


-

(385)

(385)

Write-offs

-

-

-


-

-

-


(649)

649

-


(649)

649

-

Interest due
but unpaid

-

-

-


-

-

-


37

(37)

-


37

(37)

-

Discount unwind

-

-

-


-

-

-


-

24

24


-

24

24

Exchange translation differences and
other movements

(862)

197

(665)


-

(190)

(190)


59

33

92


(803)

40

(763)

As at 31 December 2023

190,999

(325)

190,674


2,472

(140)

2,332


1,485

(759)

726


194,956

(1,224)

193,732

Income statement ECL (charge)/release


63




(192)




(464)




(593)


Recoveries of amounts previously written off


-




-




239




239


Total credit impairment
(charge)/release


63




(192)




(225)




(354)


1      The gross balance includes the notional amount of off-balance sheet instruments



Page 22

 

Consumer, Private and Business Banking - Secured (audited)

Amortised cost
and FVOCI

Stage 1


Stage 2


Stage 3


Total

Gross balance1
$million

Total credit impair-ment
$million

Net
$million

Gross balance1
$million

Total credit impair-ment
$million

Net
$million

Gross balance1
$million

Total credit impair-ment
$million

Net
$million

Gross balance1
$million

Total credit impair-ment
$million

Net
$million

As at 1 January 2022

136,600

(96)

136,504


2,685

(32)

2,653


1,103

(517)

586


140,388

(645)

139,743

Transfers to stage 1

3,080

(28)

3,052


(3,054)

28

(3,026)


(26)

-

(26)


-

-

-

Transfers to stage 2

(3,254)

11

(3,243)


3,319

(11)

3,308


(65)

-

(65)


-

-

-

Transfers to stage 3

(38)

1

(37)


(473)

1

(472)


511

(2)

509


-

-

-

Net change in exposures

3,093

(8)

3,085


(945)

1

(944)


(259)

-

(259)


1,889

(7)

1,882

Net remeasurement from stage changes

-

1

1


-

(1)

(1)


-

(4)

(4)


-

(4)

(4)

Changes in risk parameters

-

(4)

(4)


-

48

48


-

(80)

(80)


-

(36)

(36)

Write-offs

-

-

-


-

-

-


(78)

78

-


(78)

78

-

Interest due
but unpaid

-

-

-


-

-

-


-

-

-


-

-

-

Discount unwind

-

-

-


-

-

-


-

-

-


-

-

-

Exchange translation differences and
other movements

(4,119)

63

(4,056)


(119)

(51)

(170)


(158)

(27)

(185)


(4,396)

(15)

(4,411)

As at 31 December 2022

135,362

(60)

135,302


1,413

(17)

1,396


1,028

(552)

476


137,803

(629)

137,174

Income statement ECL (charge)/release


(11)




48




(84)




(47)


Recoveries of amounts previously written off


-




-




55




55


Total credit impairment
(charge)/release


(11)




48




(29)




8


As at 1 January 2023

135,362

(60)

135,302


1,413

(17)

1,396


1,028

(552)

476


137,803

(629)

137,174

Transfers to stage 1

3,311

(20)

3,291


(3,302)

20

(3,282)


(9)

-

(9)


-

-

-

Transfers to stage 2

(5,340)

11

(5,329)


5,436

(9)

5,427


(96)

(2)

(98)


-

-

-

Transfers to stage 3

(28)

1

(27)


(463)

1

(462)


491

(2)

489


-

-

-

Net change in exposures

(3,138)

(16)

(3,154)


(1,250)

3

(1,247)


(216)

-

(216)


(4,604)

(13)

(4,617)

Net remeasurement from stage changes

-

4

4


-

(16)

(16)


-

(3)

(3)


-

(15)

(15)

Changes in risk parameters

-

22

22


-

24

24


-

(110)

(110)


-

(64)

(64)

Write-offs

-

-

-


-

-

-


(109)

109

-


(109)

109

-

Interest due
but unpaid

-

-

-


-

-

-


(3)

3

-


(3)

3

-

Discount unwind

-

-

-


-

-

-


-

12

12


-

12

12

Exchange translation differences and
other movements

(369)

25

(344)


(7)

(22)

(29)


(24)

20

(4)


(400)

23

(377)

As at 31 December 2023

129,798

(33)

129,765


1,827

(16)

1,811


1,062

(525)

537


132,687

(574)

132,113

Income statement ECL (charge)/release


10




11




(113)




(92)


Recoveries of amounts previously written off


-




-




68




68


Total credit impairment
(charge)/release


10




11




(45)




(24)


1      The gross balance includes the notional amount of off-balance sheet instruments



Page 23

Consumer, Private and Business Banking - Unsecured (audited)

Amortised cost
and FVOCI

Stage 1


Stage 2


Stage 3


Total

Gross balance1
$million

Total credit impair-ment
$million

Net
$million

Gross balance1
$million

Total credit impair-ment
$million

Net
$million

Gross balance1
$million

Total credit impair-ment
$million

Net
$million

Gross balance1
$million

Total credit impair-ment
$million

Net
$million

As at 1 January 2022

54,260

(281)

53,979


990

(153)

837


475

(280)

195


55,725

(714)

55,011

Transfers to stage 1

1,718

(286)

1,432


(1,711)

286

(1,425)


(7)

-

(7)


-

-

-

Transfers to stage 2

(2,244)

81

(2,163)


2,259

(81)

2,178


(15)

-

(15)


-

-

-

Transfers to stage 3

(43)

(1)

(44)


(417)

150

(267)


460

(149)

311


-

-

-

Net change in exposures

5,979

(41)

5,938


(666)

18

(648)


(137)

-

(137)


5,176

(23)

5,153

Net remeasurement from stage changes

-

31

31


-

(81)

(81)


-

(21)

(21)


-

(71)

(71)

Changes in risk parameters

-

67

67


-

(180)

(180)


-

(251)

(251)


-

(364)

(364)

Write-offs

-

-

-


-

-

-


(457)

457

-


(457)

457

-

Interest due
but unpaid

-

-

-


-

-

-


(27)

27

-


(27)

27

-

Discount unwind

-

-

-


-

-

-


-

26

26


-

26

26

Exchange translation differences and
other movements

(1,793)

77

(1,716)


(47)

(60)

(107)


134

(33)

101


(1,706)

(16)

(1,722)

As at 31 December 2022

57,877

(353)

57,524


408

(101)

307


426

(224)

202


58,711

(678)

58,033

Income statement ECL (charge)/release


57




(243)




(272)




(458)


Recoveries of amounts previously written off


-




-




190




190


Total credit impairment
(charge)/release


57




(243)




(82)




(268)


As at 1 January 2023

57,877

(353)

57,524


408

(101)

307


426

(224)

202


58,711

(678)

58,033

Transfers to stage 1

954

(226)

728


(952)

226

(726)


(2)

-

(2)


-

-

-

Transfers to stage 2

(2,204)

62

(2,142)


2,231

(64)

2,167


(27)

2

(25)


-

-

-

Transfers to stage 3

(36)

-

(36)


(586)

186

(400)


622

(186)

436


-

-

-

Net change in exposures

5,103

(62)

5,041


(463)

11

(452)


(179)

-

(179)


4,461

(51)

4,410

Net remeasurement from stage changes

-

27

27


-

(121)

(121)


-

(35)

(35)


-

(129)

(129)

Changes in risk parameters

-

88

88


-

(93)

(93)


-

(316)

(316)


-

(321)

(321)

Write-offs

-

-

-


-

-

-


(540)

540

-


(540)

540

-

Interest due
but unpaid

-

-

-


-

-

-


40

(40)

-


40

(40)

-

Discount unwind

-

-

-


-

-

-


-

12

12


-

12

12

Exchange translation differences and
other movements

(493)

172

(321)


7

(168)

(161)


83

13

96


(403)

17

(386)

As at 31 December 2023

61,201

(292)

60,909


645

(124)

521


423

(234)

189


62,269

(650)

61,619

Income statement ECL (charge)/release


53




(203)




(351)




(501)


Recoveries of amounts previously written off


-




-




171




171


Total credit impairment
(charge)/release


53




(203)




(180)




(330)


1      The gross balance includes the notional amount of off-balance sheet instruments

 

Page 24

Analysis of stage 2 balances

The table below analyses total stage 2 gross on-and off-balance sheet exposures and associated expected credit provisions by the key significant increase in credit risk (SICR) driver that caused the exposures to be classified as stage 2 as at 31 December 2023 and 31 December 2022 for each segment.

Where multiple drivers apply, the exposure is allocated based on the table order. For example, a loan may have breached the PD thresholds and could also be on non-purely precautionary early alert; in this instance, the exposure is reported under 'Increase in PD'.


2023

Corporate, Commercial & Institutional Banking


Consumer, Private & Business Banking


Ventures


Central & other items1


Total

Gross
$million

ECL
$million

Coverage
%

Gross
$million

ECL
$million

Coverage
%

Gross
$million

ECL
$million

Coverage
%

Gross
$million

ECL
$million

Coverage
%

Gross
$million

ECL
$million

Coverage
%

Increase in PD

8,262

75

0.9%


1,962

109

5.6%


96

23

24.0%


599

13

2.2%


10,919

220

2.0%

Non-purely precautionary early alert

5,136

26

0.5%


37

-

0.0%


-

-

0.0%


-

-

0.0%


5,173

26

0.5%

Higher risk (CG12)

1,008

56

5.6%


26

1

3.8%


-

-

0.0%


2,020

17

0.8%


3,054

74

2.4%

Sub-investment grade

-

-

0.0%


-

-

0.0%


-

-

0.0%


-

-

0.0%


-

-

0.0%

Top up/Sell down (Private Banking)

-

-

0.0%


148

2

1.4%


-

-

0.0%


-

-

0.0%


148

2

1.4%

Others

2,467

37

1.5%


151

16

10.6%


-

-

0.0%


489

-

0.0%


3,107

53

1.7%

30 days past due

-

-

0.0%


148

12

8.1%


2

-

0.0%


-

-

0.0%


150

12

8.0%

Management overlay

-

124

0.0%


-

-

0.0%


-

-

0.0%


-

17

0.0%


-

141

0.0%

Total stage 2

16,873

318

1.9%


2,472

140

5.7%


98

23

23.5%


3,108

47

1.5%


22,551

528

2.3%

 


2022

Corporate, Commercial &
Institutional Banking


Consumer, Private &
Business Banking


Ventures


Central & other items1


Total

Gross
$million

ECL
$million

Coverage
%

Gross
$million

ECL
$million

Coverage
%

Gross
$million

ECL
$million

Coverage
%

Gross
$million

ECL
$million

Coverage
%

Gross
$million

ECL
$million

Coverage
%

Increase in PD

13,620

192

1.4%


1,389

89

6.4%


-

-

0.0%


2,973

11

0.4%


17,982

292

1.6%

Non-purely precautionary early alert

3,272

12

0.4%


35

-

0.0%


-

-

0.0%


5

-

0.0%


3,312

12

0.4%

Higher risk (CG12)

653

30

4.6%


18

1

5.6%


-

-

0.0%


2,534

69

2.7%


3,205

100

3.1%

Sub-investment grade

-

-

0.0%


-

-

0.0%


-

-

0.0%


95

11

11.6%


95

11

11.6%

Top up/Sell down (Private Banking)

-

-

0.0%


111

-

0.0%


-

-

0.0%


-

-

0.0%


111

-

0.0%

Others

2,603

41

1.6%


122

4

3.3%


-

-

0.0%


451

7

1.6%


3,176

52

1.6%

30 days past due

-

-

0.0%


146

12

8.2%


47

3

6.4%


-

-

0.0%


193

15

7.8%

Management overlay

-

136

0.0%


-

12

0.0%


-

-

0.0%


-

-

0.0%


-

148

0.0%

Total stage 2

20,148

411

2.0%


1,821

118

6.5%


47

3

6.4%


6,058

98

1.6%


28,074

630

2.2%

1      Includes Gross and ECL for Cash and balances at central banks and Assets held for sale



Page 25

Credit impairment charge (audited)

The table below analyses credit impairment charges or releases of the ongoing business portfolio and restructuring business portfolio for the year ended 31 December 2023.

Further details can be found in the 'Summary of performance in 2023'.


2023


20221

Stage 1 & 2
$million

Stage 3
$million

Total
$million

Stage 1 & 2
$million

Stage 3
$million

Total
$million

Ongoing business portfolio








Corporate, Commercial
& Institutional Banking

11

112

123


148

277

425

Consumer, Private & Business Banking

129

225

354


151

111

262

Ventures

42

43

85


13

3

16

Central & other items

(44)

10

(34)


95

38

133

Credit impairment charge/(release)

138

390

528


407

429

836

Restructuring business portfolio








Others

1

(21)

(20)


(1)

1

-

Credit impairment charge/(release)

1

(21)

(20)


(1)

1

-

Total credit impairment charge/(release)

139

369

508


406

430

836

1   Underlying credit impairment has been restated for the removal of (i) exit markets and businesses in AME and (ii) Aviation Finance. No change to reported credit impairment

Problem credit management and provisioning (audited)

Forborne and other modified loans by client segment

A forborne loan arises when a concession has been made to the contractual terms of a loan in response to a customer's financial difficulties.

Net forborne loans decreased by $120 million to $1,005 million (31 December 2022: $1,125 million) largely on performing forborne loans stock. The net performing forborne loans declined from $151 million to $38 million while net non-performing forborne loans remained stable at $967 million (31 December 2022: $974 million).

Amortised cost

2023


2022

Corporate, Commercial & Institutional Banking
$million

Consumer, Private & Business Banking
$million

Ventures
$million

Total
$million

Corporate, Commercial & Institutional Banking
$million

Consumer, Private & Business Banking
$million

Ventures
$million

Total
$million

All loans with forbearance measures

2,340

314

-

2,654


2,129

377

-

2,506

Credit impairment (stage 1 and 2)

-

(2)

-

(2)


(1)

-

-

(1)

Credit impairment (stage 3)

(1,529)

(118)

-

(1,647)


(1,253)

(127)

-

(1,380)

Net carrying value

811

194

-

1,005


875

250

-

1,125

Included within the above table










Gross performing forborne loans

-

40

-

40


89

63

-

152

Modification of terms and conditions1

-

40

-

40


89

63

-

152

Refinancing2

-

-

-

-


-

-

-

-

Impairment provisions

-

(2)

-

(2)


(1)

-

-

(1)

Modification of terms and conditions1

-

(2)

-

(2)


(1)

-

-

(1)

Refinancing2

-

-

-

-


-

-

-

-

Net performing forborne loans

-

38

-

38


88

63

-

151

Collateral

-

31

-

31


7

60

-

67

Gross non-performing forborne loans

2,340

274

-

2,614


2,040

314

-

2,354

Modification of terms and conditions1

2,113

274

-

2,387


1,997

314

-

2,311

Refinancing2

227

-

-

227


43

-

-

43

Impairment provisions

(1,529)

(118)

-

(1,647)


(1,253)

(127)

-

(1,380)

Modification of terms and conditions1

(1,337)

(118)

-

(1,454)


(1,210)

(127)

-

(1,337)

Refinancing2

(192)

-

-

(192)


(43)

-

-

(43)

Net non-performing forborne loans

811

156

-

967


787

187

-

974

Collateral

341

49

-

390


243

68

-

311

1      Modification of terms is any contractual change apart from refinancing, as a result of credit stress of the counterparty, i.e. interest reductions, loan covenant waivers

2      Refinancing is a new contract to a borrower in credit stress, such that they are refinanced and can pay other debt contracts that they were unable to honour

Page 26

 

Forborne and other modified loans by region

Net forborne loans decreased by $120 million to $1,005 million (31 December 2022: $1,125 million) mainly in the performing forborne loans, in particular the Asia and the Europe and Americas regions.

Amortised cost

2023


2022

Asia
$million

Africa & Middle East
$million

Europe & Americas
$million

Total
$million

Asia
$million

Africa & Middle East
$million

Europe & Americas
$million

Total
$million

Performing forborne loans

34

4

-

38


129

9

13

151

Stage 3 forborne loans

661

75

231

967


568

144

262

974

Net forborne loans

695

79

231

1,005


697

153

275

1,125

Stage 3 cover ratio (audited)

The stage 3 cover ratio measures the proportion of stage 3 impairment provisions to gross stage 3 loans, and is a metric commonly used in considering impairment trends. This metric does not allow for variations in the composition of stage 3 loans and should be used in conjunction with other Credit Risk information provided, including the level of collateral cover.

The balance of stage 3 loans not covered by stage 3 impairment provisions represents the adjusted value of collateral held and the net outcome of any workout or recovery strategies. Collateral provides risk mitigation to some degree in all client segments and supports the credit quality and cover ratio assessments post impairment provisions.

Further information on collateral is provided in the 'Credit Risk mitigation' section.

Further details on stage 3 loans and advances and cover ratio can be found in the 'Summary of performance in 2023'.

2023


2022

Corporate, Commercial & Institutional Banking
$million

Consumer, Private & Business Banking
$million

Ventures
$million

Central & Others
$million

Total
$million

Corporate, Commercial & Institutional Banking
$million

Consumer, Private & Business Banking
$million

Ventures
$million

Central & Others
$million

Total
$million

Gross credit-impaired

5,508

1,484

12

224

7,228


6,143

1,453

1

248

7,845

Credit impairment provisions

(3,533)

(760)

(12)

(15)

(4,320)


(3,662)

(776)

(1)

(18)

(4,457)

Net credit-impaired

1,975

724

-

209

2,908


2,481

677

-

230

3,388

Cover ratio

64%

51%

100%

7%

60%


60%

53%

100%

7%

57%

Collateral ($ million)

623

554

-

-

1,177


956

543

-

-

1,499

Cover ratio (after collateral)

75%

89%

100%

7%

76%


75%

91%

100%

7%

76%

Credit-impaired (stage 3) loans and advances by geographic region

Stage 3 gross loans decreased by $0.6 billion to $7.2 billion (31 December 2022: $7.8 billion). The decrease was primarily driven by repayments and write-offs in the Africa and the Middle East, which was offset by new inflows in Asia.

Further details can be found in the 'Summary of performance in 2023'.

Amortised cost

2023


2022

Asia
$million

Africa & Middle East
$million

Europe & Americas
$million

Total
$million

Asia
$million

Africa & Middle East
$million

Europe & Americas
$million

Total
$million

Gross credit-impaired

4,604

2,273

351

7,228


4,562

2,725

558

7,845

Credit impairment provisions

(2,734)

(1,388)

(198)

(4,320)


(2,483)

(1,765)

(209)

(4,457)

Net credit-impaired

1,870

885

153

2,908


2,079

960

349

3,388

Cover ratio

59%

61%

56%

60%


54%

65%

37%

57%

Credit Risk mitigation

Potential credit losses from any given account, customer or portfolio are mitigated using a range of tools such as collateral, netting arrangements, credit insurance and credit derivatives, taking into account expected volatility and guarantees.

The reliance that can be placed on these mitigants is carefully assessed in light of issues such as legal certainty and enforceability, market valuation correlation and counterparty risk of the guarantor.



Page 27

Collateral (audited)

A secured loan is one where the borrower pledges an asset as collateral of which the Group is able to take possession in the event that the borrower defaults.

The unadjusted market value of collateral across all asset types, in respect of CCIB, without adjusting for over-collateralisation, reduced to $290 billion (31 December 2022: $345 billion) predominantly due to a reduction in reverse repos.

The collateral values in the table below (which covers loans and advances to banks and customers, excluding those held at fair value through profit or loss) are adjusted where appropriate in accordance with our risk mitigation policy and for the effect of over-collateralisation. The extent of over-collateralisation has been determined with reference to both the drawn and undrawn components of exposure as this best reflects the effect of collateral and other credit enhancements on the amounts arising from expected credit losses. The value of collateral reflects management's best estimate and is backtested against our prior experience. On average, across all types of non-cash collateral, the value ascribed is approximately half of its current market value.

CCIB collateral decreased by $1.7 billion to $36.5 billion (31 December 2022: $38.2 billion) and CPBB collateral decreased by $5.5 billion to $86.8 billion (31 December 2022: $92.4 billion) due to exposure reductions from the mortgage portfolio. Total collateral for Central and other items decreased by $8.7 billion to $2.5 billion (31 December 2022: $11.2 billion) due to a decrease in stage 1 reverse repos. However, collateral for stage 2 Central and other items increased by $1 billion (31 December 2022: Nil) due to short-term reverse repo with a Central Bank in the Africa and Middle East region.

Collateral held on loans and advances

The table below details collateral held against exposures, separately disclosing stage 2 and stage 3 exposure and corresponding collateral.

Amortised cost

2023

Net amount outstanding


Collateral


Net exposure

Total
$million

Stage 2 financial
assets
$million

Credit-impaired financial
assets (S3)
$million

Total2
$million

Stage 2 financial
assets
$million

Credit-impaired financial
assets (S3)
$million

Total
$million

Stage 2 financial
assets
$million

Credit-impaired financial
assets (S3)
$million

Corporate, Commercial & Institutional Banking1

175,382

8,175

2,046


36,458

2,972

623


138,924

5,203

1,423

Consumer, Private & Business Banking

126,059

2,163

724


86,827

1,136

554


39,232

1,027

170

Ventures

1,033

33

-


-

-

-


1,033

33

-

Central & other items

29,478

964

209


2,475

964

-


27,003

-

209

Total

331,952

11,335

2,979


125,760

5,072

1,177


206,192

6,263

1,802

 

Amortised cost

2022

Net amount outstanding


Collateral


Net exposure

Total
$million

Stage 2 financial
assets
$million

Credit-impaired financial
assets (S3)
$million

Total2
$million

Stage 2 financial
assets
$million

Credit-impaired financial
assets (S3)
$million

Total
$million

Stage 2 financial
assets
$million

Credit-impaired financial
assets (S3)
$million

Corporate, Commercial & Institutional Banking1

179,150

11,366

2,526


38,151

3,973

956


140,999

7393

1,570

Consumer, Private & Business Banking

130,955

1,550

677


92,350

1,019

543


38,605

531

134

Ventures

698

17

-


-

-

-


698

17

-

Central & other items

39,363

-

230


11,214

-

-


28,149

-

230

Total

350,166

12,933

3,433


141,715

4,992

1,499


208,451

7,941

1,934

1      Includes loans and advances to banks

2      Adjusted for over-collateralisation based on the drawn and undrawn components of exposures



Page 28

Collateral - Corporate, Commercial & Institutional Banking (audited)

Collateral taken for longer-term and sub-investment grade corporate loans reduced to 41 per cent (31 December 2022: 53 per cent) primarily due to the exit of the Aviation business.

Our underwriting standards encourage taking specific charges on assets and we consistently seek high-quality, investment-grade collateral.

83 per cent (31 December 2022: 85 per cent) of tangible collateral excluding reverse repurchase agreements and financial guarantees held comprises physical assets or is property based, with the remainder held in cash. Overall collateral decreased by $2 billion to $36 billion (31 December 2022: $38 billion) mainly due to a decrease in property collateral.

Non-tangible collateral, such as guarantees and standby letters of credit, is also held against corporate exposures, although the financial effect of this type of collateral is less significant in terms of recoveries. However, this is considered when determining the probability of default and other credit-related factors. Collateral is also held against off balance sheet exposures, including undrawn commitments and trade-related instruments.

Corporate, Commercial & Institutional Banking

Amortised cost

2023
$million

2022
$million

Maximum exposure

175,382

179,150

Property

9,339

10,152

Plant, machinery and other stock

933

1,168

Cash

2,985

2,797

Reverse repos

13,826

14,305

AA- to AA+2

1,036

92

A- to A+2

10,606

10,459

BBB- to BBB+

855

1,485

Lower than BBB-

169

-

Unrated

1,160

2,269

Financial guarantees and insurance

5,057

5,096

Commodities

5

37

Ships and aircraft

4,313

4,596

Total value of collateral1

36,458

38,151

Net exposure

138,924

140,999

1      Adjusted for over-collateralisation based on the drawn and undrawn components of exposures

2      Prior year has been represented to provide granular credit ratings

Collateral - Consumer, Private & Business Banking (audited)

In CPBB, fully secured products remain stable at 85 per cent of the total portfolio (31 December 2022: 86 per cent).

The following table presents an analysis of loans to individuals by product; split between fully secured, partially secured and unsecured.

Amortised cost

2023


2022

Fully
secured
$million

Partially secured
$million

Unsecured
$million

Total
$million

Fully
secured
 $million

Partially secured
$million

Unsecured
$million

Total
$million

Maximum exposure

106,914

505

18,640

126,059


112,556

449

17,950

130,955

Loans to individuals










Mortgages

82,943

-

-

82,943


87,212

-

-

87,212

CCPL

375

-

17,395

17,770


221

-

16,711

16,932

Auto

312

-

-

312


502

-

-

502

Secured wealth products

20,303

-

-

20,303


19,551

-

-

19,551

Other

2,981

505

1,245

4,731


5,070

449

1,239

6,758

Total collateral1




86,827





92,350

Net exposure2




39,232





38,605

Percentage of total loans

85%

0%

15%



86%

0%

14%


1      Collateral values are adjusted where appropriate in accordance with our risk mitigation policy and for the effect of over-collateralisation

2      Amounts net of ECL



Page 29

Mortgage loan-to-value ratios by geography (audited)

Loan-to-value (LTV) ratios measure the ratio of the current mortgage outstanding to the current fair value of the properties on which they are secured.

In a majority of mortgages, the value of property held as security significantly exceeds principal outstanding of the mortgage loans. The average LTV of the overall mortgage portfolio increased to 47.1 per cent (31 December 2022: 44.7 per cent) driven by property prices decrease in a few key markets, including Hong Kong, Korea and China. Hong Kong, which represents 39.9 per cent of the residential mortgage portfolio, has an average LTV of 55.9 per cent (31 December 2022: 52.6 per cent). The increase of Hong Kong residential mortgage LTV is due to a decrease of the Property Price Index. All of our other key markets continue to have low portfolio LTVs (Korea, Singapore and Taiwan at 40.5 per cent, 43.0 per cent and 47.0 per cent respectively). Korea average LTV increase is due to government relaxations whereby highly regulated areas have eased up to accommodate customers with higher LTV.

An analysis of LTV ratios by geography for the mortgage portfolio is presented in the table below.

Amortised cost

2023

Asia
%
Gross

Africa &
Middle East
%
Gross

Europe &
Americas
%
Gross

Total
%
Gross

Less than 50 per cent

55.5

51.1

31.0

54.8

50 per cent to 59 per cent

17.1

14.7

17.4

17.1

60 per cent to 69 per cent

11.4

13.7

33.9

12.0

70 per cent to 79 per cent

7.7

12.8

14.4

7.9

80 per cent to 89 per cent

3.3

3.9

2.5

3.3

90 per cent to 99 per cent

2.6

2.1

0.6

2.5

100 per cent and greater

2.5

1.7

0.3

2.4

Average portfolio loan-to-value

46.9

51.1

56.0

47.1

Loans to individuals - mortgages ($million)

79,517

1,183

2,243

82,943

 

Amortised cost

2022

Asia1

%
Gross

Africa &
Middle East
%
Gross

Europe &
Americas
%
Gross

Total
%
Gross

Less than 50 per cent

60.9

43.0

32.2

60.1

50 per cent to 59 per cent

15.5

18.2

19.2

15.6

60 per cent to 69 per cent

9.8

16.8

31.3

10.2

70 per cent to 79 per cent

6.5

12.8

14.8

6.7

80 per cent to 89 per cent

3.6

5.1

1.1

3.6

90 per cent to 99 per cent

2.5

2.0

-

2.4

100 per cent and greater

1.4

2.2

1.3

1.4

Average portfolio loan-to-value

44.4

54.3

56.6

44.7

Loans to individuals - mortgages ($million)

83,954

1,388

1,870

87,212

Collateral and other credit enhancements possessed or called upon (audited)

The Group obtains assets by taking possession of collateral or calling upon other credit enhancements (such as guarantees). Repossessed properties are sold in an orderly fashion. Where the proceeds are in excess of the outstanding loan balance the excess is returned to the borrower.

Certain equity securities acquired may be held by the Group for investment purposes and are classified as fair value through profit or loss, and the related loan written off. The carrying value of collateral possessed and held by the Group is $16.5 million (31 December 2022: $14.9 million).


2023
$million

2022
$million

Property, plant and equipment

10.5

9.6

Guarantees

6.0

5.3

Total

16.5

14.9



Page 30

Other Credit risk mitigation (audited)

Other forms of credit risk mitigation are set out below.

Credit default swaps

The Group has entered into credit default swaps for portfolio management purposes, referencing loan assets with a notional value of $3.5 billion (31 December 2022: $5.1 billion). These credit default swaps are accounted for as financial guarantees as per IFRS 9 as they will only reimburse the holder for an incurred loss on an underlying debt instrument. The Group continues to hold the underlying assets referenced in the credit default swaps and it continues to be exposed to related Credit Risk and Foreign Exchange Rate Risk on these assets.

Credit linked notes

The Group has issued credit linked notes for portfolio management purposes, referencing loan assets with a notional value of $22.5 billion (31 December 2022: $13.5 billion). The Group continues to hold the underlying assets for which the credit linked notes provide mitigation. The credit linked notes are recognised as a financial liability at amortised cost on the balance sheet.

Derivative financial instruments

The Group enters into master netting agreements, which in the event of default result in a single amount owed by or to the counterparty through netting the sum of the positive and negative mark-to-market values of applicable derivative transactions. Credit Risk mitigation for derivative financial instruments is set out below.

Off-balance sheet exposures

For certain types of exposures, such as letters of credit and guarantees, the Group obtains collateral such as cash depending on internal Credit Risk assessments, as well as in the case of letters of credit holding legal title to the underlying assets should a default take place.

Other portfolio analysis

This section provides maturity analysis by credit quality by industry and industry and retail products analysis by region.

Maturity analysis of loans and advances by client segment

Loans and advances to the CCIB segment remain predominantly short-term, with $91 billion (31 December 2022: $98 billion) maturing in less than one year. 98 per cent (31 December 2022: 96 per cent) of loans to banks mature in less than one year, an increase compared with 2022 as net exposures increased by $5.5 billion to $45 billion (31 December 2022: $39.5 billion). Shorter maturities give us the flexibility to respond promptly to events and rebalance or reduce our exposure to clients or sectors that are facing increased pressure or uncertainty.

The CPBB short-term book of one year or less and long-term book of over five years is stable at 26 per cent (31 December 2022: 25 per cent) and 63 per cent (31 December 2022: 64 per cent) of the total portfolio respectively.

Amortised cost

2023

One year or less
$million

One to five years
$million

Over five years
$million

Total
 $million

Corporate, Commercial & Institutional Banking

90,728

30,746

12,822

134,296

Consumer, Private & Business Banking

33,397

13,711

80,166

127,274

Ventures

747

334

-

1,081

Central & other items

29,448

43

3

29,494

Gross loans and advances to customers

154,320

44,834

92,991

292,145

Impairment provisions

(4,872)

(185)

(113)

(5,170)

Net loans and advances to customers

149,448

44,649

92,878

286,975

Net loans and advances to banks

43,955

1,021

1

44,977

 

Page 31

Amortised cost

2022

One year or less
$million

One to five years
$million

Over five years
$million

Total
$million

Corporate, Commercial & Institutional Banking

98,335

34,635

10,789

143,759

Consumer, Private & Business Banking

33,365

14,161

84,731

132,257

Ventures

548

162

-

710

Central & other items

39,373

-

8

39,381

Gross loans and advances to customers

171,621

48,958

95,528

316,107

Impairment provisions

(4,767)

(574)

(119)

(5,460)

Net loans and advances to customers

166,854

48,384

95,409

310,647

Net loans and advances to banks

38,105

1,211

203

39,519

Credit quality by industry

Loans and advances

This section provides an analysis of the Group's amortised cost portfolio by industry on a gross, total credit impairment and net basis.

Amortised cost

2023

Stage 1


Stage 2


Stage 3


Total

Gross balance
$million

Total credit impair-ment
$million

Net carrying amount
$million

Gross balance
$million

Total credit impair-ment
$million

Net carrying amount
$million

Gross balance
$million

Total credit impair-ment
$million

Net carrying amount
$million

Gross balance
$million

Total credit impair-ment
$million

Net carrying amount
$million

Industry:
















Energy

9,397

(8)

9,389


672

(22)

650


949

(535)

414


11,018

(565)

10,453

Manufacturing

21,239

(8)

21,231


708

(16)

692


656

(436)

220


22,603

(460)

22,143

Financing, insurance and non-banking

31,633

(13)

31,620


571

(1)

570


80

(77)

3


32,284

(91)

32,193

Transport, telecom and utilities

14,710

(8)

14,702


1,722

(36)

1,686


481

(178)

303


16,913

(222)

16,691

Food and household products

7,668

(15)

7,653


323

(7)

316


355

(262)

93


8,346

(284)

8,062

Commercial
real estate

12,261

(30)

12,231


1,848

(129)

1,719


1,712

(1,191)

521


15,821

(1,350)

14,471

Mining and quarrying

5,995

(4)

5,991


220

(10)

210


151

(84)

67


6,366

(98)

6,268

Consumer durables

5,815

(3)

5,812


300

(21)

279


329

(298)

31


6,444

(322)

6,122

Construction

2,230

(2)

2,228


502

(8)

494


358

(326)

32


3,090

(336)

2,754

Trading companies & distributors

581

-

581


57

-

57


107

(58)

49


745

(58)

687

Government

33,400

(6)

33,394


1,783

(5)

1,778


367

(33)

334


35,550

(44)

35,506

Other

4,262

(4)

4,258


161

(3)

158


187

(70)

117


4,610

(77)

4,533

Retail Products:
















Mortgage

81,210

(8)

81,202


1,350

(5)

1,345


519

(123)

396


83,079

(136)

82,943

Credit Cards

7,633

(104)

7,529


244

(65)

179


69

(50)

19


7,946

(219)

7,727

Personal loans
and other
unsecured lending

10,867

(188)

10,679


324

(77)

247


315

(165)

150


11,506

(430)

11,076

Auto

310

-

310


1

-

1


1

-

1


312

-

312

Secured wealth products

19,923

(22)

19,901


278

(10)

268


474

(340)

134


20,675

(372)

20,303

Other

4,558

(7)

4,551


161

(5)

156


118

(94)

24


4,837

(106)

4,731

Net carrying value (customers)¹

273,692

(430)

273,262


11,225

(420)

10,805


7,228

(4,320)

2,908


292,145

(5,170)

286,975

1      Includes reverse repurchase agreements and other similar secured lending held at amortised cost of $13,996 million



Page 32

Amortised cost

2022

Stage 1


Stage 2


Stage 3


Total

Gross balance
$million

Total credit impair-ment
$million

Net carrying amount
$million

Gross balance
$million

Total credit impair-ment
$million

Net carrying amount
$million

Gross balance
$million

Total credit impair-ment
$million

Net carrying amount
$million

Gross balance
$million

Total credit impair-ment
$million

Net carrying amount
$million

Industry:
















Energy

10,959

(8)

10,951


818

(7)

811


1,324

(620)

704


13,101

(635)

12,466

Manufacturing

20,990

(23)

20,967


1,089

(27)

1,062


777

(518)

259


22,856

(568)

22,288

Financing, insurance and non-banking

34,915

(9)

34,906


774

(3)

771


195

(175)

20


35,884

(187)

35,697

Transport, telecom and utilities

14,273

(22)

14,251


2,347

(36)

2,311


669

(224)

445


17,289

(282)

17,007

Food and household products

7,841

(21)

7,820


695

(20)

675


418

(259)

159


8,954

(300)

8,654

Commercial real estate

12,393

(43)

12,350


3,217

(195)

3,022


1,305

(761)

544


16,915

(999)

15,916

Mining and quarrying

5,482

(4)

5,478


537

(5)

532


248

(174)

74


6,267

(183)

6,084

Consumer durables

6,403

(4)

6,399


420

(17)

403


358

(307)

51


7,181

(328)

6,853

Construction

2,424

(2)

2,422


407

(5)

402


495

(410)

85


3,326

(417)

2,909

Trading companies & distributors

2,205

(1)

2,204


170

(2)

168


122

(80)

42


2,497

(83)

2,414

Government

42,825

(2)

42,823


603

(1)

602


168

(15)

153


43,596

(18)

43,578

Other

4,684

(4)

4,680


278

(5)

273


312

(137)

175


5,274

(146)

5,128

Retail Products:
















Mortgage

85,859

(12)

85,847


996

(7)

989


556

(180)

376


87,411

(199)

87,212

Credit Cards

6,912

(103)

6,809


155

(46)

109


59

(44)

15


7,126

(193)

6,933

Personal loans
and other
unsecured lending

10,652

(253)

10,399


215

(57)

158


296

(156)

140


11,163

(466)

10,697

Auto

501

-

501


1

-

1


-

-

-


502

-

502

Secured wealth products

19,269

(45)

19,224


235

(10)

225


407

(305)

102


19,911

(360)

19,551

Other

6,632

(3)

6,629


86

(1)

85


136

(92)

44


6,854

(96)

6,758

Net carrying value (customers)¹

295,219

(559)

294,660


13,043

(444)

12,599


7,845

(4,457)

3,388


316,107

(5,460)

310,647

1      Includes reverse repurchase agreements and other similar secured lending held at amortised cost of $24,498 million

Industry and Retail Products analysis of loans and advances by geographic region

This section provides an analysis of the Group's amortised cost loan portfolio, net of provisions, by industry and region.

In the CCIB and Central and other items segment, our largest industry exposures are to Government, Financing, insurance and non-banking and Manufacturing with each constituting at least 8 per cent of CCIB and Central and other items loans and advances to customers.

Financing, insurance and non-banking industry clients are mostly investment-grade institutions and this lending forms part of the liquidity management of the Group. The Manufacturing sector group is spread across a diverse range of industries, including automobiles and components, capital goods, pharmaceuticals, biotech and life sciences, technology hardware and equipment, chemicals, paper products and packaging, with lending spread over 3,255 clients.

The Mortgage portfolio continues to be the largest portion of the CPBB portfolio at $83.1 billion (31 December 2022: $87.4 billion), of which 96 per cent continues to be in Asia. Credit cards, personal loans and other unsecured lending increased to 15 per cent (31 December 2022: 14 per cent) of the CPBB portfolio, mainly in Asia due to the growth from Mox Bank and digital partnerships.

In Asia, the Financing, insurance and non-banking industry decreased by $1.9 billion to $22.8 billion (31 December 2022: $24.7 billion) while the CRE sector decreased by $2 billion to $11.2 billion (31 December 2022: $13.2 billion) due to exposure reductions. The Government sector decreased by $9.2 billion to $30.5 billion (31 December 2022: $39.7 billion) due to decreased lending to Korea.

Page 33

Amortisecd cost

2023


2022

Asia
$million

Africa & Middle East
$million

Europe & Americas
$million

Total
$million

Asia
$million

Africa & Middle East
$million

Europe & Americas
$million

Total
$million

Industry:










Energy

4,143

3,986

2,324

10,453


6,250

2,278

3,938

12,466

Manufacturing

16,828

1,077

4,238

22,143


17,388

1,267

3,633

22,288

Financing, insurance and non-banking

22,771

829

8,593

32,193


24,674

761

10,262

35,697

Transport, telecom and utilities

12,122

2,650

1,919

16,691


10,841

3,567

2,599

17,007

Food and household products

4,856

1,726

1,480

8,062


4,160

2,566

1,928

8,654

Commercial real estate

11,176

623

2,672

14,471


13,179

598

2,139

15,916

Mining and quarrying

3,856

375

2,037

6,268


3,785

390

1,909

6,084

Consumer durables

5,033

429

660

6,122


5,860

461

532

6,853

Construction

1,803

333

618

2,754


1,775

625

509

2,909

Trading companies and distributors

527

109

51

687


2,281

101

32

2,414

Government

30,487

4,778

241

35,506


39,713

3,759

106

43,578

Other

3,401

584

548

4,533


3,636

702

790

5,128

Retail Products:










Mortgages

79,517

1,183

2,243

82,943


83,954

1,388

1,870

87,212

Credit Cards

7,449

278

-

7,727


6,642

291

-

6,933

Personal loans and other
unsecured lending

9,426

1,565

85

11,076


9,056

1,541

100

10,697

Auto

295

17

-

312


469

33

-

502

Secured wealth products

18,774

987

542

20,303


17,876

1,048

627

19,551

Other

4,671

60

-

4,731


6,676

82

-

6,758

Net loans and advances to customers

237,135

21,589

28,251

286,975


258,215

21,458

30,974

310,647

Net loans and advances to banks

35,417

3,106

6,454

44,977


22,058

3,929

13,532

39,519

Vulnerable, cyclical and high carbon sectors

Vulnerable and cyclical sectors are those that the Group considers to be most at risk from current economic stresses, including volatile energy and commodity prices, and we continue to monitor exposures to these sectors particularly carefully.

Sectors are identified and grouped as per the International Standard Industrial Classification (ISIC) system and exposure numbers have been updated to include all in-scope ISIC codes used for target setting among the high carbon sectors.

The maximum exposures shown in the table include Loans and Advances to Customers at Amortised cost, Fair Value through profit or loss, and committed facilities available as per IFRS 9 - Financial Instruments in $million.

Further details can be found in the 'Summary of Performance in 2023'.

Page 34

Maximum exposure


2023

Maximum
on Balance Sheet Exposure (net of credit impairment)
$million

Collateral
$million

Net On Balance Sheet Exposure
$million

Undrawn Commitments (net of credit impairment)
$million

Financial Guarantees (net of credit impairment)
$million

Net Off Balance Sheet Exposure
$million

Total On & Off Balance Sheet Net Exposure
$million

Industry:








Automotive manufacturers¹

3,564

65

3,499

3,791

538

4,329

7,828

Aviation1,2

1,775

974

801

1,794

668

2,462

3,263

Of which : High Carbon Sector

1,330

974

356

944

615

1,559

1,915

Commodity Traders2

7,406

303

7,103

2,591

6,281

8,872

15,975

Metals & Mining1.2

4,589

307

4,282

3,373

1,218

4,591

8,873

Of which: Steel1

1,596

193

1,403

601

358

959

2,362

Of which: Coal Mining1

29

9

20

51

99

150

170

Of which: Aluminium1

526

9

517

338

188

526

1,043

Of which: Other Metals & Mining1

2,438

96

2,342

2,383

573

2,956

5,298

Shipping1

5,964

3,557

2,407

2,261

291

2,552

4,959

Construction2

2,853

448

2,405

2,753

5,927

8,680

11,085

Commercial Real Estate2

14,533

6,363

8,170

4,658

311

4,969

13,139

Of which: High Carbon Sector

7,498

3,383

4,115

1,587

112

1,699

5,814

Hotels & Tourism2

1,680

715

965

1,339

227

1,566

2,531

Oil & Gas1,2

6,278

894

5,384

7,845

6,944

14,789

20,173

Power1

5,411

1,231

4,180

3,982

732

4,714

8,894

Total3

54,053

14,857

39,196

34,387

23,137

57,524

96,720

Of which: Vulnerable and cyclical sectors

38,880

9,983

28,897

24,842

21,511

46,353

75,250

Of which: High carbon sectors4

34,634

10,411

24,223

23,783

10,450

34,233

58,456

Total Corporate, Commercial & Institutional Banking

130,405

32,744

97,661

104,437

63,183

167,620

265,281

Total Group

331,952

125,760

206,192

182,299

74,278

256,577

462,769

1      High carbon sectors

2      Vulnerable and cyclical sectors

3      Maximum On Balance sheet exposure include FVTPL portion of $955 million, of which Vulnerable sector is $821 million and High Carbon sector is $443 million

4  Excluded Cement to the value of $671 million net of ECL under Construction



Page 35


2022

Maximum
On Balance Sheet Exposure (net of credit impairment)
$million

Collateral
$million

Net On Balance Sheet Exposure
$million

Undrawn Commitments (net of credit impairment)
$million

Financial Guarantees (net of credit impairment)
$million

Net Off Balance Sheet Exposure
$million

Total On & Off Balance Sheet Net Exposure
$million

Industry:








Automotive manufacturers1

3,167

84

3,083

3,683

560

4,243

7,326

Aviation1,2,3

3,154

1,597

1,557

1,762

632

2,394

3,951

Of which : High Carbon Sector

2,540

1,582

958

695

555

1,250

2,208

Commodity Traders2

8,133

341

7,792

2,578

6,095

8,673

16,465

Metals & Mining1.2

4,990

333

4,657

3,732

930

4,662

9,319

Of which: Steel1

1,227

157

1,070

1,450

327

1,777

2,847

Of which: Coal Mining1

48

15

33

8

7

15

48

Of which: Aluminium1

728

107

621

285

74

359

980

Of which: Other Metals & Mining1

2,987

54

2,933

1,989

522

2,511

5,444

Shipping1

5,322

3,167

2,155

1,870

256

2,126

4,281

Construction2

2,909

552

2,357

2,762

5,969

8,731

11,088

Commercial Real Estate2

16,286

7,205

9,081

6,258

224

6,482

15,563

Of which: High Carbon Sector

6,547

2,344

4,203

3,996

90

4,086

8,289

Hotels & Tourism2

1,741

919

822

1,346

138

1,484

2,306

Oil & Gas1,2

6,668

806

5,862

7,630

7,158

14,788

20,650

Power1

4,771

1,258

3,513

4,169

1,176

5,345

8,858

Total4

57,141

16,262

40,879

35,790

23,138

58,928

99,807

Of which: Vulnerable and cyclical sectors

43,678

11,741

31,937

25,761

21,068

46,829

78,766

Of which: High carbon sectors5

34,005

9,574

24,431

25,775

10,725

36,500

60,931

Total Corporate, Commercial & Institutional Banking

139,631

35,229

104,402

95,272

51,662

146,934

251,336

Total Group

350,166

141,715

208,451

168,574

60,224

228,798

437,249

1      High carbon sectors

2      Vulnerable and cyclical sectors

3      In addition to the aviation sector loan exposures, the Group owns $3.2 billion of aircraft under operating leases in 2022

4      Maximum On Balance sheet exposure include FVTPL portion of $1,251 million, of which Vulnerable sector is $1,072 million and High Carbon sector is $574 million

5  Excluded Cement to the value of $671 million net of ECL under Construction

 

Loans and advances by stage

Amortised Cost

2023

Stage 1


Stage 2


Stage 3


Total

Gross Balance
$million

Total Credit Impair-ment
$million

Net Carrying Amount
$million

Gross Balance
$million

Total Credit Impair-ment
$million

Net Carrying Amount
$million

Gross Balance
$million

Total Credit Impair-ment
$million

Net Carrying Amount
$million

Gross Balance
$million

Total Credit Impair-ment
$million

Net Carrying Amount
$million

Industry:
















Aviation

1,619

-

1,619


55

(1)

54


74

(15)

59


1,748

(16)

1,732

Commodity Traders

6,912

(2)

6,910


129

(1)

128


555

(504)

51


7,596

(507)

7,089

Metals & Mining

3,934

(1)

3,933


140

(8)

132


154

(88)

66


4,228

(97)

4,131

Construction

2,230

(2)

2,228


502

(8)

494


358

(326)

32


3,090

(336)

2,754

Commercial
Real Estate

12,261

(30)

12,231


1,848

(129)

1,719


1,712

(1,191)

521


15,821

(1,350)

14,471

Hotels & Tourism

1,468

(2)

1,466


61

-

61


126

(25)

101


1,655

(27)

1,628

Oil & Gas

5,234

(4)

5,230


615

(15)

600


571

(147)

424


6,420

(166)

6,254

Total

33,658

(41)

33,617


3,350

(162)

3,188


3,550

(2,296)

1,254


40,558

(2,499)

38,059

Total Corporate, Commercial & Institutional Banking

120,886

(101)

120,785


7,902

(257)

7,645


5,508

(3,533)

1,975


134,296

(3,891)

130,405

Total Group

318,076

(438)

317,638


11,765

(430)

11,335


7,305

(4,326)

2,979


337,146

(5,194)

331,952

 

Page 36

Amortised Cost

2022

Stage 1


Stage 2


Stage 3


Total

Gross Balance
$million

Total Credit Impair-ment
$million

Net Carrying Amount
$million

Gross Balance
$million

Total Credit Impair-ment
$million

Net Carrying Amount
$million

Gross Balance
$million

Total Credit Impair-ment
$million

Net Carrying Amount
$million

Gross Balance
$million

Total Credit Impair-ment
$million

Net Carrying Amount
$million

Industry:
















Aviation¹

2,377

(1)

2,376


573

-

573


155

(32)

123


3,105

(33)

3,072

Commodity Traders

7,187

(6)

7,181


138

(2)

136


689

(435)

254


8,014

(443)

7,571

Metals & Mining

4,184

(1)

4,183


475

(4)

471


257

(157)

100


4,916

(162)

4,754

Construction

2,424

(2)

2,422


407

(5)

402


497

(412)

85


3,328

(419)

2,909

Commercial
Real Estate

12,393

(43)

12,350


3,217

(195)

3,022


1,305

(761)

544


16,915

(999)

15,916

Hotels & Tourism

1,448

(2)

1,446


108

(1)

107


206

(18)

188


1,762

(21)

1,741

Oil & Gas

5,468

(4)

5,464


708

(6)

702


919

(442)

477


7,095

(452)

6,643

Total

35,481

(59)

35,422


5,626

(213)

5,413


4,028

(2,257)

1,771


45,135

(2,529)

42,606

Total Corporate, Commercial & Institutional Banking

126,261

(143)

126,118


11,355

(323)

11,032


6,143

(3,662)

2,481


143,759

(4,128)

139,631

Total Group

334,368

(568)

333,800


13,380

(447)

12,933


7,904

(4,471)

3,433


355,652

(5,486)

350,166

1      In addition to the aviation sector loan exposures, the Group owns $3.2 billion of aircraft under operating leases in 2022

Loans and advances by region (net of credit impairment)


2023


2022¹

Asia
$million

Africa & Middle East
$million

Europe & Americas
$million

Total
$million

Asia
$million

Africa & Middle East
$million

Europe & Americas
$million

Total
$million

Industry:










Aviation

1,077

7

648

1,732


1,105

1,259

708

3,072

Commodity Traders

3,778

675

2,636

7,089


3,497

978

3,096

7,571

Metals & Mining

1,628

1,522

981

4,131


2,966

347

1,441

4,754

Construction

1,803

333

618

2,754


1,776

624

509

2,909

Commercial Real Estate

11,176

623

2,672

14,471


13,180

598

2,138

15,916

Hotel & Tourism

998

178

452

1,628


880

465

396

1,741

Oil & Gas

2,639

1,815

1,800

6,254


3,574

1,445

1,624

6,643

Total

23,099

5,153

9,807

38,059


26,978

5,716

9,912

42,606

1      In addition to the aviation sector loan exposures, the Group owns $3.2 billion of aircraft under operating leases in 2022

Credit quality - loans and advances

Amortised Cost

 

Credit Grade

2023

Aviation
Gross
$million

Commodity Traders
Gross
$million

Construction
Gross
$million

Metals & Mining
Gross
$million

Commercial Real Estate
Gross
$million

Hotel & Tourism
Gross
$million

Oil & Gas
Gross
$million

Total
Gross
$million

Strong

1,452

4,444

1,012

3,213

7,326

1,090

4,024

22,561

Satisfactory

222

2,592

1,702

788

6,751

439

1,726

14,220

Higher risk

-

5

18

73

32

-

101

229

Credit impaired (stage 3)

74

555

358

154

1,712

126

569

3,548

Total Gross Balance

1,748

7,596

3,090

4,228

15,821

1,655

6,420

40,558

Strong

-

(1)

(1)

-

(20)

(1)

(3)

(26)

Satisfactory

(1)

(2)

(6)

(1)

(139)

(1)

(12)

(162)

Higher risk

-

-

(4)

(8)

-

-

(4)

(16)

Credit impaired (stage 3)

(15)

(504)

(325)

(88)

(1,191)

(25)

(147)

(2,295)

Total Credit Impairment

(16)

(507)

(336)

(97)

(1,350)

(27)

(166)

(2,499)

Strong

0.0%

0.0%

0.1%

0.0%

0.3%

0.1%

0.1%

0.1%

Satisfactory

0.5%

0.1%

0.4%

0.1%

2.1%

0.2%

0.7%

1.1%

Higher risk

0.0%

0.0%

22.2%

11.0%

0.0%

0.0%

4.0%

7.0%

Credit impaired (stage 3)

20.3%

90.8%

90.8%

57.1%

69.6%

19.8%

25.8%

64.7%

Cover Ratio

0.9%

6.7%

10.9%

2.3%

8.5%

1.6%

2.6%

6.2%



Page 37

Credit Grade

2022

Aviation¹
Gross
$million

Commodity Traders
Gross
$million

Construction
Gross
$million

Metals & Mining
Gross
$million

Commercial Real Estate
Gross
$million

Hotel & Tourism
Gross
$million

Oil & Gas
Gross
$million

Total
Gross
$million

Strong

1,437

4,419

1,164

3,425

8,000

1,047

3,923

23,415

Satisfactory

1,413

2,894

1,634

1,208

7,334

494

2,215

17,192

Higher risk

100

12

33

26

276

15

38

500

Credit impaired (stage 3)

155

689

497

257

1,305

206

919

4,028

Total Gross Balance

3,105

8,014

3,328

4,916

16,915

1,762

7,095

45,135

Strong

-

(3)

-

-

(25)

(1)

(1)

(30)

Satisfactory

(1)

(4)

(3)

(5)

(129)

(1)

(7)

(150)

Higher risk

-

(1)

(4)

-

(84)

(1)

(2)

(92)

Credit impaired (stage 3)

(32)

(435)

(412)

(157)

(761)

(18)

(442)

(2,257)

Total Credit Impairment

(33)

(443)

(419)

(162)

(999)

(21)

(452)

(2,529)

Strong

0.0%

0.1%

0.0%

0.0%

0.3%

0.1%

0.0%

0.1%

Satisfactory

0.1%

0.1%

0.2%

0.4%

1.8%

0.2%

0.3%

0.9%

Higher risk

0.0%

8.3%

12.1%

0.0%

30.4%

6.7%

5.3%

18.4%

Credit impaired (stage 3)

20.6%

63.1%

82.9%

61.1%

58.3%

8.7%

48.1%

56.0%

Cover Ratio

1.1%

5.5%

12.6%

3.3%

5.9%

1.2%

6.4%

5.6%

1      In addition to the aviation sector loan exposures, the Group owns $3.2 billion of aircraft under operating leases in 2022

Maturity and expected credit loss for high-carbon sectors


2023


Maturity Buckets¹


2023

Loans and advances (Drawn funding)

Less than
1 year

More than
1 to 5 years

More than
5 years

Expected
Credit Loss

Sector

$million


$million

$million

$million


$million

Automotive Manufacturers

3,566


3,106

460

-


2

Aviation

1,339


149

145

1,045


9

Cement

719


512

189

18


48

Coal Mining

42


9

33

-


13

Steel

1,649


1,258

185

206


53

Other Metals & Mining

2,151


1,886

240

25


34

Aluminium

537


442

63

32


11

Oil & Gas

6,444


2,980

1,576

1,888


166

Power

5,516


1,933

1,533

2,050


105

Shipping

5,971


1,051

2,568

2,352


7

Commercial Real Estate

7,664


3,722

3,935

7


166

Total balance1

35,598


17,048

10,927

7,623


614

1      Excluded fair value of Other Metals & Mining of $321 million


2022


Maturity Buckets¹


2022

Loans and advances
(Drawn funding)

Less than
1 year

More than
1 to 5 years

More than
5 years

Expected
Credit Loss

Sector

$million


$million

$million

$million


$million

Automotive Manufacturers

3,167


2,450

717

-


-

Aviation

2,595


118

749

1,728


55

Cement

762


661

63

38


43

Coal Mining

60


2

41

17


12

Steel

1,268


1,080

180

8


41

Other Metals & Mining

1,964


1,660

281

23


44

Aluminium

744


528

114

102


16

Oil & Gas

6,550


3,100

1,734

1,716


238

Power

4,903


1,615

1,279

2,009


132

Shipping

5,374


918

2,567

1,889


52

Commercial Real Estate

6,598


2,568

3,949

81


51

Total balance2

33,985


14,700

11,674

7,611


684

1      Gross of credit impairment

2      Excluded fair value of Other Metals & Mining and Oil & Gas of $58 million



Page 38

China commercial real estate

The table below represents the on and off-balance sheet items that are exposed to China CRE by credit quality.

Further details can be found in the 'Summary of Performance in 2023'


2023

China
$million

Hong Kong
$million

Rest of Group1
$million

Total
$million

Loans to customers

584

1,821

39

2,444

Off balance sheet

42

82

-

124

Total as at 31 December 2023

626

1,903

39

2,568






Loans to customers - By Credit quality





Gross





Strong

33

-

-

33

Satisfactory

339

619

39

997

Higher risk

8

-

-

8

Credit impaired (stage 3)

204

1,202

-

1,406

Total as at 31 December 2023

584

1,821

39

2,444






Loans to customers - ECL





Strong

-

-

-

-

Satisfactory

(3)

(134)

(12)

(149)

Higher risk

-

-

-

-

Credit impaired (stage 3)

(70)

(941)

-

(1,011)

Total as at 31 December 2023

(73)

(1,075)

(12)

(1,160)

1      Rest of Group mainly includes Singapore


2022

China
$million

Hong Kong
$million

Rest of Group1
$million

Total
$million

Loans to customers

953

2,248

39

3,240

Off balance sheet

74

85

8

167

Total as at 31 December 2022

1,027

2,333

47

3,407






Loans to customers - By Credit quality





Gross





Strong

256

221

-

477

Satisfactory

459

921

39

1,419

Higher risk

-

271

-

271

Credit impaired (stage 3)

238

835

-

1,073

Total as at 31 December 2022

953

2,248

39

3,240






Loans to customers - ECL





Strong

-

(19)

-

(19)

Satisfactory

(9)

(110)

-

(119)

Higher risk

-

(83)

-

(83)

Credit impaired (stage 3)

(37)

(559)

-

(596)

Total as at 31 December 2022

(46)

(771)

-

(817)

1      Rest of Group mainly includes Singapore



Page 39

Debt securities and other eligible bills (audited)

This section provides further detail on gross debt securities and treasury bills.

The standard credit ratings used by the Group are those used by Standard & Poor's or its equivalent. Debt securities held that have a short-term rating are reported against the long-term rating of the issuer. For securities that are unrated, the Group applies an internal credit rating, as described under the credit rating and measurement section.

Total gross debt securities and other eligible bills decreased by $11.4 billion to $160 billion (31 December 2022: $172 billion) due to action taken to manage liquidity, primarily in stage 1.

Stage 1 gross balance decreased by $7.8 billion to $158 billion (31 December 2022: $166 billion) of which $3.4 billion of the decrease was from unrated.

Stage 2 gross balance decreased by $3.6 billion to $2 billion (31 December 2022: $5 billion).

Stage 3 gross balance was broadly stable at $0.2 billion (31 December 2022: $0.1 billion).

Amortised cost and FVOCI

2023


2022

Gross
$million

ECL
$million

Net2
$million

Gross
$million

ECL
$million

Net2
$million

Stage 1

158,314

(26)

158,288


166,103

(25)

166,078

AAA

61,920

(5)

61,915


73,933

(10)

73,923

AA- to AA+

34,244

(2)

34,242


42,327

(4)

42,323

A- to A+

38,891

(2)

38,889


29,488

(2)

29,486

BBB- to BBB+

13,098

(7)

13,091


7,387

(1)

7,386

Lower than BBB-

1,611

(2)

1,609


1,047

(2)

1,045

Unrated

8,550

(8)

8,542


11,921

(6)

11,915

- Strong

7,415

(7)

7,408


11,760

(6)

11,754

- Satisfactory

1,135

(1)

1,134


161

-

161

Stage 2

1,860

(34)

1,826


5,455

(90)

5,365

AAA

98

-

98


21

-

21

AA- to AA+

22

-

22


40

-

40

A- to A+

81

-

81


17

(1)

16

BBB- to BBB+

499

(3)

496


2,605

(16)

2,589

Lower than BBB-

893

(30)

863


2,485

(71)

2,414

Unrated

267

(1)

266


287

(2)

285

- Strong

217

-

217


26

(2)

24

- Satisfactory

50

(1)

49


-

-

-

- Higher risk

-

-

-


261

-

261

Stage 3

164

(61)

103


144

(106)

38

Lower than BBB-

72

(4)

68


67

(55)

12

Unrated

92

(57)

35


77

(51)

26

Gross balance¹

160,338

(121)

160,217


171,702

(221)

171,481

1      Stage 3 gross includes $80 million (31 December 2022: $28 million) originated credit-impaired debt securities with impairment of $14 million (31 December 2022:
$13 million)

2      FVOCI instrument are not presented net of ECL. While the presentation is on a net basis for the table, the total net on-balance sheet amount is $160,263 million
(31 December 2022: $171,640 million). Refer to the Analysis of financial instrument by stage table



Page 40

IFRS 9 expected credit loss methodology (audited)

Approach for determining expected credit losses

Credit loss terminology

Component

Definition

Probability of default (PD)

The probability that a counterparty will default, over the next 12 months from the reporting date (stage 1) or over the lifetime of the product (stage 2), incorporating the impact of forward-looking economic assumptions that have an effect on Credit Risk, such as unemployment rates and GDP forecasts.

The PD estimates will fluctuate in line with the economic cycle. The lifetime (or term structure) PDs are based on statistical models, calibrated using historical data and adjusted to incorporate forward-looking economic assumptions.

Loss given default (LGD)

The loss that is expected to arise on default, incorporating the impact of forward-looking economic assumptions where relevant, which represents the difference between the contractual cashflows due and those that the bank expects to receive.

The Group estimates LGD based on the history of recovery rates and considers the recovery of any collateral that is integral to the financial asset, taking into account forward-looking economic assumptions where relevant.

Exposure at default (EAD)

The expected balance sheet exposure at the time of default, taking into account expected changes over the lifetime of the exposure. This incorporates the impact of drawdowns of facilities with limits, repayments of principal and interest, and amortisation.

To determine the expected credit loss, these components are multiplied together: PD for the reference period (up to 12 months or lifetime) x LGD x EAD and discounted to the balance sheet date using the effective interest rate as the discount rate.

IFRS 9 expected credit loss models have been developed for the Corporate, Commercial and Institutional Banking (CCIB) businesses on a global basis, in line with their respective portfolios. However, for some of the key countries, country-specific models have also been developed.

The calibration of forward-looking information is assessed at a country or region level to take into account local macroeconomic conditions.

Retail expected credit loss models are country and product specific given the local nature of the CPBB business.

For less material retail portfolios, the Group has adopted less sophisticated approaches based on historical roll rates or loss rates:

For medium-sized retail portfolios, a roll rate model is applied, which uses a matrix that gives the average loan migration rate between delinquency states from period to period. A matrix multiplication is then performed to generate the final PDs by delinquency bucket over different time horizons.

For smaller retail portfolios, loss rate models are applied. These use an adjusted gross charge-off rate, developed using monthly write-off and recoveries over the preceding 12 months and total outstanding balances.

While the loss rate models do not incorporate forward-looking information, to the extent that there are significant changes in the macroeconomic forecasts an assessment will be completed on whether an adjustment to the modelled output is required.

For a limited number of exposures, proxy parameters or approaches are used where the data is not available to calculate the origination PDs for the purpose of applying the SICR criteria; or for some retail portfolios where a full history of LGD data is not available, estimates based on the loss experience from similar portfolios are used. The use of proxies is monitored and will reduce over time.

The following processes are in place to assess the ongoing performance of the models:

Quarterly model monitoring that uses recent data to compare the differences between model predictions and actual outcomes against approved thresholds.

Annual independent validations of the performance of material models by Group Model Valuation (GMV); an abridged validation is completed for non-material models.



Page 41

Application of lifetime

Expected credit loss is estimated based on the period over which the Group is exposed to Credit Risk. For the majority of exposures this equates to the maximum contractual period. For retail credit cards and corporate overdraft facilities, however, the Group does not typically enforce the contractual period, which can be as short as one day. As a result, the period over which the Group is exposed to Credit Risk for these instruments reflects their behavioural life, which incorporates expectations of customer behaviour and the extent to which Credit Risk management actions curtail the period of that exposure. The average behavioural life for retail credit cards is between 3 and 6 years across our footprint markets.

The behavioural life for corporate overdraft facilities is 24 months.

Composition of credit impairment provisions (audited)

The table below summarises the key components of the Group's credit impairment provision balances at 31 December 2023 and 31 December 2022.

31 December 2023

Corporate, Commercial & Institutional
Banking
$ million

Consumer,
Private &
Business
Banking
$ million

Ventures
$ million

Central &
other items
$ million2

Total
$ million

Modelled ECL provisions (base forecast)

372

553

48

98

1,071

Modelled impact of multiple economic scenarios

20

18

-

6

44

Total ECL provisions before management judgements

392

571

48

104

1,115

Includes: Model performance post model adjustments

(3)

(28)

-

-

(31)

Judgemental post model adjustments

-

2

-

-

2

Management overlays1






- China commercial real estate

141

-

-

-

141

- Other

-

5

-

17

22

Total modelled provisions

533

578

48

121

1,280

Of which:                        Stage 1

151

325

15

68

559

                         Stage 2

318

140

21

49

528

                         Stage 3

64

113

12

4

193

Stage 3 non-modelled provisions

3,587

646

-

88

4,321

Total credit impairment provisions

4,120

1,224

48

209

5,601

 

31 December 2022

Corporate, Commercial & Institutional
Banking
$ million

Consumer,
Private &
Business
Banking
$ million

Ventures
$ million

Central &
other items2
$ million

Total
$ million

Modelled ECL provisions (base forecast)

505

556

12

194

1,267

Modelled impact of multiple economic scenarios

38

6

-

6

50

Total ECL provisions before management judgements

543

562

12

200

1,317

Includes: Model performance post model adjustments

(22)

(38)

-

-

(60)

Judgemental post model adjustments

-

44

-

-

44

Management overlays1






- China commercial real estate

173

-

-

-

173

- Other

9

37

-

-

46

Total modelled provisions

725

643

12

200

1,580

Of which:   Stage 1

194

413

10

34

651

                         Stage 2

411

118

1

100

630

                         Stage 3

120

112

1

66

299

Stage 3 non-modelled provisions

3,702

664

-

129

4,495

Total credit impairment provisions

4,427

1,307

12

329

6,075

1      $22 million (31 December 2022: $55 million) is in stage 1, $141 million (31 December 2022: $148 million) in stage 2 and $nil million (31 December 2022: $16 million) in stage 3

2      Includes ECL on cash and balances at central banks, accrued income, assets held for sale and other assets



Page 42

Model performance post model adjustments (PMA)

As part of normal model monitoring and validation operational processes, where a model's performance breaches the monitoring thresholds or validation standards, an assessment is completed to determine whether a model performance post model adjustment is required to correct for the identified model issue. Model performance post model adjustments are approved by the Group Credit Model Assessment Committee and will be removed when the models are updated to correct for the identified model issue or the estimates return to being within the monitoring thresholds.

As at 31 December 2023, model performance post model adjustments have been applied for 5 models out of the total of 172 models. In aggregate, these post model adjustments reduce the Group's impairment provisions by $31 million (2 per cent of modelled provisions) compared with a $60 million decrease at 31 December 2022. The most significant of these relates to an adjustment to decrease ECL for Korea Personal Loans as the IFRS 9 PD model is sensitive to the higher range of interest rates.

In addition to these model performance post model adjustments, separate judgemental post model and management adjustments have also been applied as set out on the following pages.


2023
$ million

2022
$ million

Model performance PMAs



Corporate, Commercial & Institutional Banking

(3)

(22)

Consumer, Private & Business Banking

(28)

(38)

Total model performance PMAs

(31)

(60)

Key assumptions and judgements in determining expected credit loss

Incorporation of forward-looking information

The evolving economic environment is a key determinant of the ability of a bank's clients to meet their obligations as they fall due. It is a fundamental principle of IFRS 9 that the provisions banks hold against potential future Credit Risk losses should depend, not just on the health of the economy today, but should also take into account potential changes to the economic environment. For example, if a bank were to anticipate a sharp slowdown in the world economy over the coming year, it should hold more provisions today to absorb the credit losses likely to occur in the near future.

To capture the effect of changes to the economic environment, the PDs and LGDs used to calculate ECL incorporate forward-looking information in the form of forecasts of the values of economic variables and asset prices that are likely to have an effect on the repayment ability of the Group's clients.

The 'base forecast' of the economic variables and asset prices is based on management's view of the five-year outlook, supported by projections from the Group's in-house research team and outputs from a third-party model that project specific economic variables and asset prices. The research team takes consensus views into consideration, and senior management review projections for some core country variables against consensus when forming their view of the outlook. For the period beyond five years, management utilises the in-house research view and third-party model outputs, which allow for a reversion to long-term growth rates or norms. All projections are updated on a quarterly basis.

Forecast of key macroeconomic variables underlying the expected credit loss calculation and the impact on non-linearity

In the Base Forecast - management's view of the most likely outcome -the pace of growth of the world economy is expected to slow marginally in the near term. Global GDP is forecast to grow by just below 3 per cent in 2024. World GDP growth averaged 3.7 per cent for the 10 years prior to COVID-19 (between 2010 and 2019). The world economy should be able to achieve a soft landing after the most aggressive monetary tightening cycle in years, although risks abound. The lagged impact of aggressive central bank tightening is likely to be felt most acutely in developed economies.

Page 43

Lingering inflation and geopolitical developments are risks to the global soft-landing scenario. The ongoing war in Ukraine, conflicts in the Middle East, ongoing US-China tensions, and the November 2024 US election are key sources of geopolitical and political risk; they come against a backdrop of increasing global fragmentation. On the inflation front, it is unclear whether it can slow on a sustained basis. Core inflation has remained sticky in some markets, signalling persistent underlying pressures. Structural factors - including higher fiscal deficits, the cost of the climate transition and recent under-investment in fossil fuels - could keep inflation higher than during the pre-COVID period. Oil prices and geopolitical conflict are also sources of upside inflation risk.

While the quarterly Base Forecasts inform the Group's strategic plan, one key requirement of IFRS 9 is that the assessment of provisions should consider multiple future economic environments. For example, the global economy may grow more quickly or more slowly than the Base Forecast, and these variations would have different implications for the provisions that the Group should hold today. As the negative impact of an economic downturn on credit losses tends to be greater than the positive impact of an economic upturn, if the Group sets provisions only on the ECL under the Base Forecast it might maintain a level of provisions that does not appropriately capture the range of potential outcomes. To address the inherent uncertainty in economic forecast, and the property of skewness (or non-linearity), IFRS 9 requires reported ECL to be a probability-weighted ECL, calculated over a range of possible outcomes.

To assess the range of possible outcomes the Group simulates a set of 50 scenarios around the Base Forecast, calculates the ECL under each of them and assigns an equal weight of 2 per cent to each scenario outcome. These scenarios are generated by a Monte Carlo simulation, which addresses the challenges of crafting many realistic alternative scenarios in the many countries in which the Group operates by means of a model, which produces these alternative scenarios while considering the degree of historical uncertainty (or volatility) observed from Q1 1990 to Q3 2023 around economic outcomes, the trends in each macroeconomic variable modelled and the correlation in the unexplained movements around these trends. This naturally means that each of the 50 scenarios do not have a specific narrative, although collectively they explore a range of hypothetical alternative outcomes for the global economy, including scenarios that turn out better than expected and scenarios that amplify anticipated stresses.

The GDP graphs below illustrate the shape of the Base Forecast for key footprint markets in relation to prior periods' actuals. The long-term growth rates are based on the pace of economic expansion expected for 2030. The tables below provide a summary of the Group's Base Forecast for these markets. The peak/trough amounts show the highest and lowest points within the Base Forecast.

China's GDP growth is expected to ease to 4.8 per cent in 2024 from over 5 per cent in 2023. This reflects a continued contraction in the property sector, a negative contribution from foreign trade, and low consumer and business confidence. Similarly, Hong Kong is also facing several headwinds with its GDP growth expected to ease to 2.9 per cent from 3.3 per cent in 2023. These headwinds include a weak property sector and elevated interest rates which will weigh on investment appetite for Hong Kong assets. Limited external demand from key markets will also weigh on exports. Growth in the US is expected to slow on the impact of tighter financial and credit conditions and as the impact of previous interest rate increases by the central bank feed through to the economy. For similar reasons, Eurozone growth is expected to remain weak in 2024. The uncertainty over the ongoing war in Ukraine, conflicts in the Middle East has hit global investor and business confidence. Growth in India is expected to ease to 6 per cent from 6.7 per cent in 2023 due to impact from pre-election uncertainties, tighter lending conditions and global recession concerns.

In contrast, GDP growth for Singapore is expected to accelerate to just over 2.5 per cent in 2024 from 0.8 per cent last year. Favourable base effects may boost exports, despite the soft global growth outlook. The global electronics and semiconductor industry is showing signs of bottoming out. Although a strong rebound is not expected, inventory restocking may provide a small boost to Singapore's electronics sector. Korea's economic growth will also benefit from the turnaround in this key sector. GDP growth there is expected to reach 2.3 per cent in 2024 from 1.3 per cent last year.

Page 44


2023 year-end forecasts

China


Hong Kong

GDP growth (YoY%)

Unemployment
%

3-month
interest rates
%

House prices⁵ (YoY %)

GDP growth (YoY %)

Unemployment
%

3-month
interest rates
%

House prices (YoY %)

Base forecast1










2023

5.4

4.1

2.0

(0.8)


3.3

3.0

4.8

(6.8)

2024

4.8

4.1

1.7

3.9


2.9

3.4

4.6

2.1

2025

4.5

4.0

1.8

5.6


2.5

3.4

4.1

3.8

2026

4.3

4.0

2.0

4.5


2.3

3.4

3.5

2.8

2027

4.0

3.9

2.2

4.4


2.4

3.4

2.5

2.7

5-year average2

4.3

4.0

2.1

4.6


2.5

3.4

3.4

2.8

Quarterly peak

5.7

4.1

2.5

7.2


3.8

3.4

5.0

4.6

Quarterly trough

3.8

3.8

1.7

1.5


1.5

3.4

2.3

(1.1)

Monte Carlo










Low3

0.6

3.3

0.8

(1.5)


(3.8)

1.4

0.3

(19.3)

High4

7.7

4.4

3.8

12.0


8.2

6.4

8.3

25.5

 


2023 year-end forecasts

Singapore


Korea

GDP growth (YoY%)

Unemployment
⁶ %

3-month
interest rates
%

House prices (YoY%)

GDP growth (YoY%)

Unemployment
%

3-month
interest rates
%

House prices (YoY %)

Base forecast1










2023

0.8

2.7

4.1

6.8


1.3

2.7

3.8

(5.8)

2024

2.6

2.8

3.8

(0.2)


2.3

3.3

3.5

3.3

2025

3.1

2.8

3.3

0.4


2.5

3.3

3.1

5.0

2026

3.3

2.8

2.8

2.9


2.4

3.1

3.1

3.5

2027

2.8

2.8

2.4

3.9


2.2

3.0

3.1

2.4

5-year average2

2.9

2.8

2.9

2.2


2.3

3.1

3.1

3.3

Quarterly peak

3.8

2.9

4.1

3.9


2.6

3.5

3.7

5.3

Quarterly trough

1.9

2.8

2.3

(0.7)


2.0

3.0

3.1

(0.3)

Monte Carlo










Low3

(2.4)

1.7

0.6

(16.2)


(2.3)

1.4

0.7

(6.1)

High4

8.5

3.8

5.9

19.2


7.0

5.8

6.3

12.5

 


2023 year-end forecasts

India

Brent Crude
$ pb

GDP growth
(YoY%)

Unemployment
%

3month
interest rates
%

House prices
(YoY%)

Base forecast1






2023

6.7

NA

6.4

5.3

84.2

2024

6.0

NA

5.9

5.3

89.5

2025

6.0

NA

6.3

6.3

90.3

2026

6.4

NA

6.3

6.5

92.8

2027

6.5

NA

6.2

6.4

84.9

5-year average2

6.2

NA

6.2

6.1

88.2

Quarterly peak

9.1

NA

6.3

6.5

93.8

Quarterly trough

4.4

NA

5.8

4.7

82.8

Monte Carlo






Low3

2.1

NA

2.7

(0.5)

46.0

High4

10.5

NA

9.9

13.8

137.8

 

 

Page 45


2022 year-end forecasts

China


Hong Kong

GDP growth
(YoY%)

Unemployment
%

3-month
interest rates
%

House prices⁵
(YoY%)

GDP growth
(YoY%)

Unemployment
%

3-month
interest rates
%

House prices
(YoY%)

5-year average2

5.1

3.9

2.3

3.6


2.3

3.0

2.8

1.7

Quarterly peak

7.9

4.1

3.0

5.0


4.3

3.1

3.6

4.9

Quarterly trough

4.5

3.8

1.4

0.0


0.5

2.9

2.4

(8.4)

Monte Carlo










Low3

1.1

3.4

0.6

(3.4)


(3.8)

1.7

0.5

(22.0)

High4

9.6

4.3

4.4

10.0


8.0

4.2

6.1

26.8

 


2022 year-end forecasts

Singapore


Korea

GDP growth
(YoY%)

Unemployment⁶
%

3-month
interest rates
%

House prices
(YoY%)

GDP growth
(YoY%)

Unemployment
%

3-month
interest rates
%

House prices
(YoY%)

5-year average2

2.7

3.0

3.1

2.8


2.2

3.1

3.1

2.1

Quarterly peak

3.7

3.2

4.7

4.7


2.5

3.3

3.9

2.8

Quarterly trough

1.7

3.0

2.4

(2.4)


1.8

3.0

2.7

(0.4)

Monte Carlo










Low3

(3.4)

2.1

0.8

(15.9)


(2.8)

1.1

1.1

(5.4)

High4

8.6

4.5

5.6

20.4


7.0

4.9

5.9

10.0

 


2022 year-end forecasts

India

Brent crude
$ pb

GDP growth
(YoY%)

Unemployment
%

3-month
interest rates
%

House prices
(YoY%)

5-year average2

6.4

NA

5.6

5.7

106.6

Quarterly peak

7.7

NA

6.3

7.2

118.8

Quarterly trough

3.2

NA

5.3

1.6

88.0

Monte Carlo






Low3

1.5

NA

1.9

(1.1)

42.4

High4

12.1

NA

9.5

13.0

204.2

1      Data presented are those used in the calculation of ECL. These may differ slightly to forecasts presented elsewhere in the Annual Report as they are finalised before the period end.

2      5 year averages reported cover Q1 2024 to Q4 2028 for the 2023 annual report. They cover Q1 2023 to Q4 2027 for the numbers reported for the 2022 annual report.

3      Represents the 10th percentile in the range of economic scenarios used to determine non-linearity.

4      Represents the 90th percentile in the range of economic scenarios used to determine non-linearity.

5      A judgemental management adjustment is held in respect of the China commercial real estate sector as discussed.

6      Singapore unemployment rate covers the resident unemployment rate, which refers to citizens and permanent residents.

Impact of multiple economic scenarios

The final probability-weighted ECL reported by the Group is a simple average of the ECL for each of the 50 scenarios simulated using a Monte Carlo model. The Monte Carlo approach has the advantage that it generates many alternative scenarios that cover our global footprint.

The total amount of non-linearity, calculated as the difference between the probability-weighted ECL calculated by the Monte Carlo model and the unweighted base forecast ECL, is $44 million (31 December 2022: $50 million). The CCIB and Central and other items portfolios accounted for $26 million (31 December 2022: $44 million) of the calculated non-linearity with the remaining $18 million (31 December 2022: $6 million) attributable to CPBB portfolios. As the non-linearity calculated for the CPBB portfolios at 31 December 2022 was relatively low, a judgemental post model adjustment of $34 million was applied. Subsequent stand-back analysis was completed during the first half of 2023 to benchmark the ECL non-linearity calculated using the Monte Carlo model, which confirmed that the calculated non-linearity for CPBB portfolios was appropriate and the judgemental post model adjustment was released.



Page 46

The impact of multiple economic scenarios on stage 1, stage 2 and stage 3 modelled ECL is set out in the table below, together with the management overlay and other judgemental adjustments.


Base forecast $million

Multiple economic scenarios1
$million

Management overlays and other judgemental
adjustments
$million

Total
modelled
ECL2
$million

Total expected credit loss at 31 December 2023

1,071

44

165

1.280

Total expected credit loss at 31 December 2022

1,267

84

229

1,580

1      Includes judgemental post model adjustment of $nil million (31 December 2022: $34 million) relating to Consumer, Private and Business Banking

2   Total modelled ECL comprises stage 1 and stage 2 balances of $1,105 million (31 December 2022: $1,281 million) and $193 million (31 December 2022: $299 million) of modelled ECL on stage 3 loans

3   Includes ECL on Assets held for sale of $37 million (31 December 2022: $10 million)

The average expected credit loss under multiple scenarios is 4 per cent (2022: 7 per cent) higher than the expected credit loss calculated using only the most likely scenario (the Base Forecast). Portfolios that are more sensitive to non-linearity include those with greater leverage and/or a longer tenor, such as Project and Shipping Finance portfolios. Other portfolios display minimal non-linearity owing to limited responsiveness to macroeconomic impacts for structural reasons, such as significant collateralisation as with the CPBB mortgage portfolios.

Judgemental adjustments

As at 31 December 2023, the Group held judgemental adjustments for ECL as set out in the table below. All of the judgemental adjustments have been determined after taking account of the model performance post model adjustments reported. They are reassessed quarterly and are reviewed and approved by the IFRS 9 Impairment Committee and will be released when no longer relevant.

31 December 2023

Corporate, Commercial & Institutional Banking
$ million

Consumer, Private & Business Banking

Central &
other
$ million

Total
$ million

Mortgages
$ million

Credit Cards
$ million

Other
$ million

Total
$ million

Judgemental post model adjustments

-

-

1

1

2

-

2

Judgemental management overlays:








- China CRE

141

-

-

-

-

-

141

- Other

-

1

2

2

5

17

22

Total judgemental adjustments

141

1

3

3

7

17

165

Judgemental adjustments by stage:








Stage 1

17

1

3

6

10

-

27

Stage 2

124

-

-

(3)

(3)

17

138

Stage 3

-


-

-

-

-

-

 

31 December 2022

Corporate, Commercial & Institutional Banking
$ million

Consumer, Private & Business Banking

Central &
other
$million

Total
$million

Mortgages
$ million

Credit Cards
$ million

Other
$ million

Total
$million

Judgemental post model adjustments

-

3

11

30

44

-

44

Judgemental management overlays:








- China CRE

173

-

-

-

-

-

173

- Other

9

2

5

30

37

-

46

Total judgemental adjustments

182

5

16

60

81

-

263

Judgemental adjustments by stage:








Stage 1

37

1

5

39

45

-

82

Stage 2

136

3

9

17

29

-

165

Stage 3

9

1

2

4

7

-

16

Judgemental post model adjustments

As at 31 December 2023, judgemental post model adjustments to increase ECL by a net $2 million (31 December 2022: $44 million increase) have been applied to certain CPBB models, primarily to adjust for temporary factors impacting modelled outputs. These will be released when these factors normalise. At 31 December 2022, $34 million of the increase in ECL related to multiple economic scenarios, which was fully released in the first half of 2023 (see 'Impact of multiple economic scenarios').

Page 47

Judgemental management overlays

China CRE

The real estate market in China has now been in a downturn since late 2021 as evidenced by continued decline in sales, and investments in the sector. Liquidity issues experienced by Chinese property developers continued into 2023 with more developers defaulting on their obligations both offshore and onshore. During 2023, authorities on the mainland have introduced a slew of policies to help revive the sector and restore buying sentiments. This has helped stabilise the market to an extent in some cities, but demand and home prices remain muted overall. Continued policy relaxations, including those related to house purchase restrictions, completion support for eligible projects from onshore financial institutions, relaxation in mortgage rates, and further support for affordable housing, are key for reversing the continued decline in sales and investments and ensuring a stable outlook for 2024.

The Group's loans and advances to China CRE clients was $2.4 billion at 31 December 2023 (31 December 2022: $3.2 billion). Client level analysis continues to be done, with clients being placed on purely precautionary or non-purely precautionary early alert, where appropriate, for closer monitoring. Given the evolving nature of the risks in the China CRE sector, a management overlay of $141 million (31 December 2022: $173 million) has been taken by estimating the impact of further deterioration to exposures in this sector. The decrease from 31 December 2022 was primarily driven by repayments and movement of some of the exposures to Stage 3.

Other

Overlays of $5 million (31 December 2022: $16 million) have also been applied in CPBB to capture macroeconomic environment challenges caused by sovereign defaults or heightened sovereign risk, the impact of which is not fully captured in the modelled outcomes. An overlay of $17 million (2022: nil) was applied in Central & Other due to a temporary market dislocation in the Africa and Middle East region.

The remaining COVID-19 overlay in CPBB of $21 million that was held as at 31 December 2022 has been fully released in 2023. The stage 3 overlay in CCIB of $9 million that was held as at 31 December 2022 following the Sri Lanka Sovereign default was also fully released in 2023.

Stage 3 assets

Credit-impaired assets managed by Stressed Asset Group (SAG) incorporate forward-looking economic assumptions in respect of the recovery outcomes identified and are assigned individual probability weightings per IFRS 9. These assumptions are not based on a Monte Carlo simulation but are informed by the Base Forecast.

Sensitivity of expected credit loss calculation to macroeconomic variables

The ECL calculation relies on multiple variables and is inherently non-linear and portfolio-dependent, which implies that no single analysis can fully demonstrate the sensitivity of the ECL to changes in the macroeconomic variables. The Group has conducted a series of analyses with the aim of identifying the macroeconomic variables which might have the greatest impact on the overall ECL. These encompassed single variable and multi-variable exercises, using simple up/ down variation and extracts from actual calculation data, as well as bespoke scenario design assessments.

The primary conclusion of these exercises is that no individual macroeconomic variable is materially influential. The Group believes this is plausible as the number of variables used in the ECL calculation is large. This does not mean that macroeconomic variables are uninfluential; rather, that the Group believes that consideration of macroeconomics should involve whole scenarios, as this aligns with the multi-variable nature of the calculation.

The Group faces downside risks in the operating environment related to the uncertainties surrounding the macroeconomic outlook. To explore this, a sensitivity analysis of ECL was undertaken to explore the effect of slower economic recoveries across the Group's footprint markets. Two downside scenarios were considered in particular to explore the current uncertainties over commodity prices. The first scenario, Global Stagflation, explores a temporary spike (relative to base) in commodity prices, inflation and interest rates in the near term from the ongoing war in Ukraine and conflicts in the Middle East. The second more severe scenario is based on the Bank of England's most recent Annual Cyclical Scenario (ACS), which explores a persistent rise in commodity prices, inflation and interest rates.

Page 48



 


Baseline


Global Stagflation


ACS

Five year
average

Peak/Trough

Five year
average

Peak/Trough

Five year
average

Peak/Trough

China GDP

4.3

5.7 / 3.8


3.7

6.2 / (0.8)


2.2

3.9 / (3.4)

China unemployment

4.0

4.1 / 3.8


5.3

6.4 / 3.8


5.3

5.7 / 4.6

China property prices

4.6

7.2 / 1.5


4.4

15.9 / (17.5)


(5.5)

9.2 / (16.3)

Hong Kong GDP

2.5

3.8 / 1.5


1.8

5.6 / (1.4)


(0.6)

2.9 / (9.4)

Hong Kong unemployment

3.4

3.4 / 3.4


5.4

7.4 / 3.4


6.3

7.5 / 3.9

Hong Kong property prices

2.8

4.6 / (1.1)


1.6

9.4 / (3.8)


(9.7)

6.2 / (22.5)

US GDP

1.7

2.3 / 0.8


1.4

2.7 / (1.3)


0.1

1.5 / (4.8)

Singapore GDP

2.9

3.8 / 1.9


2.7

5.0 / (1.6)


1.2

5.9 / (8.7)

India GDP

6.2

9.1 / 4.4


4.9

6.6 / 0.6


4.2

7.3 / (0.7)

Crude oil

88.2

93.8 / 82.8


95.3

152.9 / 82.8


118

147.9 / 83.6

Period covered from Q1 2024 to Q4 2028


Base (GDP, YoY%)


Global Stagflation


Difference from Base

2024

2025

2026

2027

2028

2024

2025

2026

2027

2028

2024

2025

2026

2027

2028

China

4.8

4.5

4.3

4.0

3.8


1.5

1.6

4.8

5.7

4.8


(3.3)

(2.9)

0.5

1.7

1.0

Hong Kong

2.9

2.5

2.3

2.4

2.2


0.9

(1.0)

1.7

5.0

2.4


(2.0)

(3.5)

(0.6)

2.5

0.2

US

1.4

1.5

1.8

1.9

1.9


0.0

0.2

1.8

2.6

2.4


(1.5)

(1.3)

0.0

0.7

0.5

Singapore

2.6

3.1

3.3

2.8

2.6


0.3

0.6

3.7

4.8

4.0


(2.3)

(2.4)

0.4

2.0

1.3

India

6.0

5.5

6.5

6.4

6.6


2.6

3.9

5.6

6.5

5.7


(3.4)

(1.6)

(0.8)

0.1

(0.9)

Each year is from Q1 to Q4. For example 2024 is from Q1 2024 to Q4 2024.


Base (GDP, YoY%)


 ACS


Difference from Base

2024

2025

2026

2027

2028

2024

2025

2026

2027

2028

2024

2025

2026

2027

2028

China

4.8

4.5

4.3

4.0

3.8


(0.9)

1.3

3.7

3.4

3.4


(5.6)

(3.2)

(0.5)

(0.6)

(0.4)

Hong Kong

2.9

2.5

2.3

2.4

2.2


(5.3)

(3.5)

2.6

1.8

1.5


(8.1)

(6.0)

0.3

(0.6)

(0.7)

US

1.4

1.5

1.8

1.9

1.9


(1.7)

(1.5)

1.0

1.3

1.3


(3.2)

(2.9)

(0.8)

(0.6)

(0.6)

Singapore

2.6

3.1

3.3

2.8

2.6


(3.8)

0.0

4.2

2.9

2.7


(6.4)

(3.1)

0.9

0.1

0.1

India

6.0

5.5

6.5

6.4

6.6


2.8

2.2

4.9

5.3

5.5


(3.2)

(3.3)

(1.6)

(1.1)

(1.2)

Each year is from Q1 to Q4. For example 2024 is from Q1 2024 to Q4 2024

The total modelled stage 1 and 2 ECL provisions (including both on and off-balance sheet instruments) would be approximately $153 million higher under the Global Stagflation scenario, and $489 million higher under the ACS scenario than the baseline ECL provisions (which excluded the impact of multiple economic scenarios and management overlays which may already capture some of the risks in these scenarios). Stage 2 exposures as a proportion of stage 1 and 2 exposures would increase from 3.7 per cent in the base case to 4.1 per cent and 6.5 per cent respectively under the Global Stagflation and ACS scenarios. This includes the impact of exposures transferring to stage 2 from stage 1 but does not consider an increase in stage 3 defaults.

Under both scenarios, the majority of the increase in ECL in CCIB came from the main corporate and CRE portfolios. For the main corporate portfolios, ECL would increase by $20 million and $79 million for the Global stagflation and ACS scenarios respectively and the proportion of stage 2 exposures would increase from 5.5 per cent in the base case to 5.9 per cent and 8.2 per cent respectively.

For the CPBB portfolios, most of the increase in ECL came from the unsecured retail portfolios, with the Taiwan and Korea Personal Loans impacted. Under the Global Stagflation and ACS scenarios, Credit card ECL would increase by $28 million and $66 million respectively, largely in the Singapore and Hong Kong portfolios and the proportion of stage 2 credit card exposures would increase from 1.5 per cent in the base case to 2.1 per cent and 3.3 per cent for each scenario respectively, with the Singapore portfolio most impacted. Mortgages ECL would increase by $1 million and $45 million for each scenario respectively, with portfolios in Hong Kong and Korea most impacted and the proportion of stage 2 mortgages would increase from 1.2 per cent in the base case to 1.7 per cent and 14 per cent respectively, with the Hong Kong and Singapore portfolios most impacted.

There was no material change in modelled stage 3 provisions as these primarily relate to unsecured CPBB exposures for which the LGD is not sensitive to changes in the macroeconomic forecasts. There is also no material change for non-modelled stage 3 exposures as these are more sensitive to client specific factors than to alternative macroeconomic scenarios.

Page 49

The actual outcome of any scenario may be materially different due to, among other factors, the effect of management actions to mitigate potential increases in risk and changes in the underlying portfolio.


Gross as
reported1
$ million

ECL as
reported2
$ million

ECL
Base case
$ million

ECL Global Stagflation
$ million

ECL ACS
$ million

Stage 1 modelled






Corporate, Commercial & Institutional Banking

337,189

134

124

136

164

Consumer, Private & Business Banking

190,999

315

306

355

455

Ventures

1,015

15

15

15

15

Central & Other items

194,673

35

32

40

50

Total stage 1 excluding management judgements

723,876

499

477

546

684

Stage 2 modelled






Corporate, Commercial & Institutional Banking

16,873

194

184

234

333

Consumer, Private & Business Banking

2,472

143

134

167

263

Ventures

54

21

21

21

21

Central & Other items

2,869

21

18

19

22

Total stage 2 excluding management judgements

22,268

379

357

441

639

Total Stage 1 & 2 modelled






Corporate, Commercial & Institutional Banking

354.062

328

308

370

497

Consumer, Private & Business Banking

193,471

458

440

522

718

Ventures

1,069

36

36

36

36

Central & Other items

197,542

56

50

59

72

Total excluding management judgements

746,144

878

834

987

1,323







Stage 3 exposures excluding other assets

8,144

4,499




Other financial assets3

111,478

59




ECL from management judgements


165




Total financial assets reported at 31 December 2023

865,766

5,601




1      Gross balances includes both on- and off- balance sheet instruments; allocation between stage 1 and 2 will differ by scenario

2      Includes ECL for both on- and off- balance sheet instruments

3      Includes cash and balances at central banks, Accrued income, Other financial assets; and Assets held for sale

Significant increase in credit risk (SICR)

Quantitative criteria

SICR is assessed by comparing the risk of default at the reporting date to the risk of default at origination. Whether a change in the risk of default is significant or not is assessed using quantitative and qualitative criteria. These criteria have been separately defined for each business and where meaningful are consistently applied across business lines.

Assets are considered to have experienced SICR if they have breached both relative and absolute thresholds for the change in the average annualised IFRS 9 lifetime probability of default (IFRS 9 PD) over the residual term of the exposure.

The absolute measure of increase in credit risk is used to capture instances where the IFRS 9 PDs on exposures are relatively low at initial recognition as these may increase by several multiples without representing a significant increase in credit risk. Where IFRS 9 PDs are relatively high at initial recognition, a relative measure is more appropriate in assessing whether there is a significant increase in credit risk, as the IFRS 9 PDs increase more quickly.

The SICR thresholds have been calibrated based on the following principles:

Stability - The thresholds are set to achieve a stable stage 2 population at a portfolio level, trying to minimise the number of accounts moving back and forth between stage 1 and stage 2 in a short period of time

Accuracy - The thresholds are set such that there is a materially higher propensity for stage 2 exposures to eventually default than is the case for stage 1 exposures

Dependency from backstops - The thresholds are stringent enough such that a high proportion of accounts transfer to stage 2 due to movements in forward-looking IFRS 9 PDs rather than relying on backward-looking backstops such as arrears

Page 50

Relationship with business and product risk profiles - the thresholds reflect the relative risk differences between different products, and are aligned to business processes

For CCIB clients the quantitative thresholds are a relative 100 per cent increase in IFRS 9 PD and an absolute change in IFRS 9 PD of between 50 and 100 bps.

For Consumer and Business Banking clients, portfolio specific quantitative thresholds in Hong Kong, Singapore, Malaysia, UAE and Taiwan are applied for credit cards and one personal loan portfolio. The thresholds include relative and absolute increases in IFRS 9 PD with average lifetime IFRS 9 PD cut-offs for those exposures that are within a range of customer utilisation limits (for credit cards) and remaining tenor (for personal loans) and differentiate between exposures that are current and those that are 1 to 29 days past due.

The range of thresholds applied are:

Portfolio

Relative IFRS 9
PD increase
(%)

Absolute IFRS 9
PD increase
(%)

Customer
utilisation
(%)

Remaining
tenor
(%)

Average
IFRS 9 PD
(lifetime)

Credit cards - Current

50% - 150%

3.4% - 9.3%

15% - 90%

-

4.15% - 11.6%

Credit cards - 1-29 days past due

100% - 210%

3.5% - 6.1%

25% - 67%

-

1.5% - 18.5%

Personal loans - Current

-

3.5%

-

70%

2.8%

Personal loan - 1-29 days past due

25%

3%

-

75%

-

For all other Consumer and Business Banking portfolios, the quantitative SICR thresholds applied are a relative threshold of 100 per cent increase in IFRS 9 PD and an absolute change in IFRS 9 PD of between 100 and 350 bps depending on the product. Certain countries have a higher absolute threshold reflecting the lower default rate within their personal loan portfolios compared with the Group's other personal loan portfolios.

Private Banking clients are assessed qualitatively, based on a delinquency measure relating to collateral top-ups or sell-downs.

Qualitative criteria

Qualitative factors that indicate that there has been a significant increase in credit risk include processes linked to current risk management, such as placing loans on non-purely precautionary early alert.

Backstop

Across all portfolios, accounts that are 30 or more days past due (DPD) on contractual payments of principal and/or interest that have not been captured by the criteria above are considered to have experienced a significant increase in credit risk.

Expert credit judgement may be applied in assessing SICR to the extent that certain risks may not have been captured by the models or through the above criteria. Such instances are expected to be rare, for example due to events and material uncertainties arising close to the reporting date.

CCIB clients

Quantitative criteria

Exposures are assessed based on both the absolute and the relative movement in the IFRS 9 PD from origination to the reporting date as described above.

To account for the fact that the mapping between internal credit grades (used in the origination process) and IFRS 9 PDs is non-linear (e.g. a one-notch downgrade in the investment grade universe results in a much smaller IFRS 9 PD increase than in the sub-investment grade universe), the absolute thresholds have been differentiated by credit quality at origination, as measured by internal credit grades being investment grade or sub-investment grade.

Qualitative criteria

All assets of clients that have been placed on early alert (for non-purely precautionary reasons) are deemed to have experienced a significant increase in credit risk.

An account is placed on non-purely precautionary early alert if it exhibits risk or potential weaknesses of a material nature requiring closer monitoring, supervision or attention by management. Weaknesses in such a borrower's account, if left uncorrected, could result in deterioration of repayment prospects and the likelihood of being downgraded. Indicators could include a rapid erosion of position within the industry, concerns over management's ability to manage operations, weak/deteriorating operating results, liquidity strain and overdue balances, among other factors.

Page 51

All client assets that have been assigned a CG12 rating, equivalent to 'Higher risk', are deemed to have experienced a significant increase in credit risk. Accounts rated CG12 are primarily managed by relationship managers in the CCIB unit with support from SAG for certain accounts. All CCIB clients are placed in CG12 when they are 30 DPD unless they are granted a waiver through a strict governance process.

Consumer and Business Banking clients

Quantitative criteria

Material portfolios (defined as a combination of country and product, for example Hong Kong mortgages, Singapore credit cards, Taiwan personal loans) for which a statistical model has been built, are assessed based on both the absolute and relative movement in the IFRS 9 PD from origination to the reporting date as described previously. For these portfolios, the original lifetime IFRS 9 PD term structure is determined based on the original Application Score or Risk Segment of the client.

Qualitative and backstop criteria

Accounts that are 30 DPD that have not been captured by the quantitative criteria are considered to have experienced a significant increase in credit risk. For less material portfolios, which are modelled based on a roll-rate or loss-rate approach, SICR is primarily assessed through the 30 DPD trigger. In addition, SICR is also assessed for where specific risk elevation events have occurred in a market that are not yet reflected in modelled outcomes or in other metrics. This is applied collectively either to impacted specific products/customer cohorts or across the overall consumer banking portfolio in the affected market.

Private Banking clients

For Private Banking clients, SICR is assessed by referencing the nature and the level of collateral against which credit is extended (known as 'Classes of Risk').

Qualitative criteria

For all Private Banking classes, in line with risk management practice, an increase in credit risk is deemed to have occurred where margining or loan-to-value covenants have been breached.

For Class I assets (lending against diversified liquid collateral), if these margining requirements have not been met within 30 days of a trigger, a significant increase in credit risk is assumed to have occurred.

For Class I and Class III assets (real-estate lending), a significant increase in credit risk is assumed to have occurred where the bank is unable to 'sell down' the applicable assets to meet revised collateral requirements within five days of a trigger.

Class II assets are typically unsecured or partially secured, or secured against illiquid collateral such as shares in private companies. Significant credit deterioration of these assets is deemed to have occurred when any early alert trigger has been breached.

Debt securities

Quantitative criteria

For debt securities originated before 1 January 2018, the bank is utilising the low Credit Risk simplified approach, where debt securities with an internal credit rating mapped to an investment grade equivalent are allocated to stage 1 and all other debt securities are allocated to stage 2. Debt securities originated after 1 January 2018 are assessed based on the absolute and relative movements in IFRS 9 PD from origination to the reporting date using the same thresholds as for Corporate, Commercial and Institutional Banking clients.

Qualitative criteria

Debt securities utilise the same qualitative criteria as the Corporate, Commercial and Institutional Banking client segments, including being placed on non-purely precautionary early alert or being classified as CG12.

Assessment of credit-impaired financial assets

Consumer and Business Banking clients

The core components in determining credit-impaired expected credit loss provisions are the value of gross charge-off and recoveries. Gross charge-off and/or loss provisions are recognised when it is established that the account is unlikely to pay through the normal process. Recovery of unsecured debt post credit impairment is recognised based on actual cash collected, either directly from clients or through the sale of defaulted loans to third-party institutions. Release of credit impairment provisions for secured loans is recognised if the loan outstanding is paid in full (release of full provision), or the provision is higher than the loan outstanding (release of the excess provision).

Page 52

CCIB and Private Banking clients

Credit-impaired accounts are managed by the Group's specialist recovery unit, Stressed Asset Group (SAG), which is independent from its main businesses. Where a portion of exposure is considered not recoverable, a stage 3 credit impairment provision is raised. This stage 3 provision is the difference between the loan-carrying amount and the probability-weighted present value of estimated future cash flows, reflecting a range of scenarios (typically the Upside, Downside and Likely recovery outcomes). Where the exposure is secured by collateral, the values used will incorporate the impact of forward-looking economic information on the value recoverable collateral and time to realise the same.

The individual circumstances of each client are considered when SAR estimates future cashflows and the timing of future recoveries which involves significant judgement. All available sources, such as cashflow arising from operations, selling assets or subsidiaries, realising collateral or payments under guarantees, are considered. In any decision relating to the raising of provisions, the Group attempts to balance economic conditions, local knowledge and experience, and the results of independent asset reviews.

Write-offs

Where it is considered that there is no realistic prospect of recovering a portion of an exposure against which an impairment provision has been raised, that amount will be written off.

Governance and application of expert credit judgement in respect of expected credit losses

The Group's Credit Policy and Standards framework details the requirements for continuous monitoring to identify any changes in credit quality and resultant ratings, as well as ensuring a consistent approach to monitoring, managing and mitigating credit risks. The framework aligns with the governance of ECL estimation through the early recognition of significant deteriorations in ratings which drive stage 2 and 3 ECL.

The models used in determining expected credit losses are reviewed and approved by the Group Credit Model Assessment Committee (CMAC), which is appointed by the Model Risk Committee. CMAC has the responsibility to assess and approve the use of models and to review all IFRS 9 interpretations related to models. CMAC also provides oversight on operational matters related to model development, performance monitoring and model validation activities, including standards and regulatory matters.

Prior to submission to CMAC for approval, the models are validated by GMV, a function which is independent of the business and the model developers. GMV's analysis comprises review of model documentation, model design and methodology, data validation, review of the model development and calibration process, out-of-sample performance testing, and assessment of compliance review against IFRS 9 rules and internal standards.

A quarterly model monitoring process is in place that uses recent data to compare the differences between model predictions and actual outcomes against approved thresholds. Where a model's performance breaches the monitoring thresholds, an assessment of whether a PMA is required to correct for the identified model issue is completed.

Key inputs into the calculation and resulting expected credit loss provisions are subject to review and approval by the IFRS 9 Impairment Committee (IIC) which is appointed by the Group Risk Committee. The IIC consists of senior representatives from Risk, Finance, and Group Economic Research. It meets at least twice every quarter; once before the models are run to approve key inputs into the calculation, and once after the models are run to approve the expected credit loss provisions and any judgemental overrides that may be necessary.

The IFRS 9 Impairment Committee:

Oversees the appropriateness of all Business Model Assessment and Solely Payments of Principal and Interest (SPPI) tests

Reviews and approves expected credit loss for financial assets classified as stages 1, 2 and 3 for each financial reporting period

Reviews and approves stage allocation rules and thresholds

Approves material adjustments in relation to expected credit loss for fair value through other comprehensive income (FVOCI) and amortised cost financial assets



 

Reviews, challenges and approves base macroeconomic forecasts and the multiple macroeconomic scenarios approach that are utilised in the forward-looking expected credit loss calculations

Page 53

 

The IFRS 9 Impairment Committee is supported by an Expert Panel which also reviews and challenges the base case projections and multiple macroeconomic scenarios. The Expert Panel consists of members of Enterprise Risk Management (which includes the Scenario Design team), Finance, Group Economic Research and country representatives of major jurisdictions.

PMAs may be applied to account for identified weaknesses in model estimates. The processes for identifying the need for, calculating the level of, and approving PMAs are prescribed in the Credit Risk IFRS 9 ECL Model Family Standards, which are approved by the Global Head, Model Risk Management. PMA calculation methodologies are reviewed by GMV and submitted to CMAC as the model approver or the IIC. All PMAs have a remediation plan to fix the identified model weakness, and these plans are reported to and tracked at CMAC.

In addition, Risk Event Overlays account for events that are sudden and therefore not captured in the Base Case Forecast or the resulting ECL calculated by the models. All Risk Event Overlays must be approved by the IIC having considered the nature of the event, why the risk is not captured in the model, and the basis on which the quantum of the overlay has been calculated. Risk Event Overlays are subject to quarterly review and re-approval by the IIC and will be released when the risks are no longer relevant.

Traded Risk

Traded Risk is the potential for loss resulting from activities undertaken by the Group in financial markets. Under the Enterprise Risk Management Framework, the Traded Risk Framework brings together Market Risk, Counterparty Credit Risk and Algorithmic Trading. Traded Risk Management is the core risk management function supporting market-facing businesses, predominantly Financial Markets and Treasury Markets.

Market Risk (audited)

Market Risk is the potential for fair value loss due to adverse moves in financial markets. The Group's exposure to Market Risk arises predominantly from the following sources:

Trading book:

The Group provides clients with access to financial markets, facilitation of which entails the Group taking moderate Market Risk positions. All trading teams support client activity. There are no proprietary trading teams. Hence, income earned from Market Risk-related activities is primarily driven by the volume of client activity rather than risk-taking

Non-trading book:

The Treasury Markets desk is required to hold a liquid assets buffer, much of which is held in high-quality marketable debt securities

The Group has capital invested and related income streams denominated in currencies other than US dollars. To the extent that these income streams are not hedged, the Group is subject to Structural Foreign Exchange Risk which is reflected in reserves

A summary of our current policies and practices regarding Market Risk management is provided in the Principal Risks section.

The primary categories of Market Risk for the Group are:

Interest Rate Risk: arising from changes in yield curves and implied volatilities on interest rate options

Foreign Exchange Rate Risk: arising from changes in currency exchange rates and implied volatilities on foreign exchange options

Commodity Risk: arising from changes in commodity prices and implied volatilities on commodity options; covering energy, precious metals, base metals and agriculture

Credit Spread Risk: arising from changes in the price of debt instruments and credit-linked derivatives, driven by factors other than the level of risk-free interest rates

Equity Risk: arising from changes in the prices of equities, equity indices, equity baskets and implied volatilities on related options



Page 54

Market risk movements (audited)

Value at Risk (VaR) allows the Group to manage Market Risk across the trading book and most of the fair valued non-trading books.

The average level of total trading and non-trading VaR in 2023 was $53.3 million, 1.5 per cent higher than 2022 ($52.5 million). The year end level of total trading and non-trading VaR in 2023 was $44.5 million, 20.2 per cent lower than 2022 ($55.8 million), due to a reduction in non-trading positions.

For the trading book, the average level of VaR in 2023 was $21.5 million, 19.4 per cent higher than 2022 ($18.0 million). Trading activities have remained relatively unchanged, and client driven.

Daily value at risk (VaR at 97.5%, one day) (audited)

Trading1 and non-trading2

2023


2022

Average
$million

High
$million

Low
$million

Year End
$million

Average
$million

High
$million

Low
$million

Year End
$million

Interest Rate Risk

39.5

54.1

23.2

30.5


27.8

42.1

21.0

24.7

Credit Spread Risk

33.8

48.0

25.0

31.7


34.2

47.1

20.3

32.9

Foreign Exchange Risk

7.0

12.2

4.2

7.4


6.5

10.3

4.8

6.8

Commodity Risk

5.8

9.7

3.7

4.3


7.0

11.9

3.5

8.3

Equity Risk

0.1

0.4

-

-


0.1

0.2

-

0.1

Diversification effect

(32.9)

N/A

N/A

(29.4)


(23.1)

N/A

N/A

(17.0)

Total

53.3

65.5

44.2

44.5


52.5

64.1

40.3

55.8

 

Trading1

2023


2022

Average
$million

High
$million

Low
$million

Year End
$million

Average
$million

High
$million

Low
$million

Year End
$million

Interest Rate Risk

13.1

20.4

7.7

11.6


8.1

11.7

5.3

9.0

Credit Spread Risk

9.4

12.4

7.4

9.4


9.5

14.9

5.0

8.7

Foreign Exchange Risk

7.0

12.2

4.2

7.4


6.5

10.3

4.8

6.8

Commodity Risk

5.8

9.7

3.7

4.4


7.0

11.9

3.5

8.3

Equity Risk

-

-

-

-


-

-

-

-

Diversification effect

(13.8)

N/A

N/A

(11.5)


(13.1)

N/A

N/A

(11.0)

Total

21.5

30.6

14.7

21.3


18.0

24.4

12.6

21.8

 

Non-trading2

2023


2022

Average
$million

High
$million

Low
$million

Year End
$million

Average
$million

High
$million

Low
$million

Year End
$million

Interest Rate Risk

34.2

43.6

19.7

23.9


26.3

44.5

18.1

23.5

Credit Spread Risk

28.3

40.1

21.5

24.4


28.8

37.8

18.7

29.2

Equity Risk

0.1

0.4

-

-


0.1

0.2

-

0.1

Diversification effect

(18.6)

N/A

N/A

(12.7)


(10.6)

N/A

N/A

(11.5)

Total

44.0

53.4

32.0

35.6


44.6

52.5

35.1

41.3

 



Page 55

The following table sets out how trading and non-trading VaR is distributed across the Group's businesses:


2023


2022

Average
$million

High
$million

Low
$million

Year End
$million

Average
$million

High
$million

Low
$million

Year End
$million

Trading1 and non-trading2

53.3

65.5

44.2

44.5


52.5

64.1

40.3

55.8

Trading1










Macro Trading3

13.8

20.2

9.2

15.4


12.8

17.4

10.2

16.9

Global Credit

12.8

18.2

8.5

10.1


10.1

15.7

4.2

8.4

XVA

4.8

7.0

3.4

4.5


3.9

5.0

2.4

4.6

Diversification effect

(9.9)

N/A

N/A

(8.7)


(8.8)

N/A

N/A

(8.1)

Total

21.5

30.6

14.7

21.3


18

24.4

12.6

21.8











Non-trading2










Treasury4

43.4

50.2

31.1

34.9


38.7

47.5

29.7

40.3

Global Credit

3.9

13.6

2.0

4.0


3.4

5.0

2.3

3.5

Listed Private Equity

0.1

0.4

0.0

0.0


0.1

0.2

-

0.1

Diversification effect

(3.4)

N/A

N/A

(3.3)


2.4

N/A

N/A

(2.6)

Total

44.0

53.4

32.0

35.6


44.6

52.5

35.1

41.3

1      The trading book for Market Risk is defined in accordance with the UK onshored Capital Requirements Regulation Part 3 Title I Chapter 3, which restricts the positions permitted in the trading book

2      The non-trading book VaR does not include syndicated loans

3      Macro Trading comprises the Rates, FX and Commodities businesses

4      Treasury comprises Treasury Markets and Treasury Capital Management businesses

Risks not in VaR

In 2023, the main market risks not reflected in VaR were:

Basis risks for which the historical market price data is limited and is therefore proxied, giving rise to potential proxy basis risk that is not captured in VaR

Potential depeg risk from currencies currently pegged or managed, as the historical one-year VaR observation period does not reflect the possibility of a change in the currency regime, such as sudden depegging

Volatility skew risk due to movements in options volatilities at different strikes while VaR reflects only movements in at-the-money volatilities

Deal contingent risk where a client is granted the right to cancel a hedging trade contingent on conditions not being met within a time window

Additional capital is set aside to cover such 'risks not in VaR'.

Backtesting

In 2023, there were five regulatory backtesting negative exceptions at Group level (in 2022 there were eight regulatory backtesting negative exceptions at Group level). Group exceptions occurred on:

16 March: After the US authorities put Silicon Valley Bank and Signature Bank into administration there were strong market reactions, including notable interest rate yield rises on 16 March

1 June: After announcement of planned potential economic reforms in Nigeria, there were sharp movements in the offshore Naira FX market in anticipation of Naira devaluation

12 June: After the governor of the Central Bank of Nigeria was removed there were further sharp movements in the offshore Naira FX market

1 November and 3 November: After the Nigerian government announced on 30 October that it plans to target an exchange rate of 750 Naira per dollar, the onshore spot market became more volatile on low volumes.

The VaR model is currently being enhanced to increase its responsiveness to abrupt upturns in market volatility.

There have been five Group exceptions in the previous 250 business days. This is within the 'amber zone' applied internationally to internal models by bank supervisors (Basel Committee on Banking Supervision, Supervisory framework for the use of backtesting in conjunction with the internal models approach to market risk capital requirements, January 1996).

Page 56

The graph below illustrates the performance of the VaR model used in capital calculations. It compares the 99 percentile profit and loss confidence level given by the VaR model with the hypothetical profit and loss of each day given the actual market movement without taking into account any intra-day trading activity.

Trading loss days


2023

2022

Number of loss days reported for Financial Markets trading book total product income1

16

15

1      Includes credit valuation adjustment (CVA) and funding valuation adjustment (FVA), and excludes Treasury Markets business (non-trading), periodic valuation changes for Capital Markets, expected loss provisions, overnight indexed swap (OIS) discounting and accounting adjustments such as debit valuation adjustments

Average daily income earned from Market Risk-related activities1 (audited)

The average level of total trading daily income in 2023 was $12 million, 14 per cent lower than 2022 ($14 million). The decrease is largely attributable to lower income in Commodities in 2023 on the back of lower volatility and falling crude oil prices. Additionally, the decrease in FX business was on the back of lower cross-border flows and muted FX volatility.

The average level of total non-trading daily income in 2023 was -$0.7 million, 217 per cent lower than 2022 ($0.6 million). The decrease is primarily attributable to lower income from the Credit Solutions business.

Trading

2023
$million

2022
$million

Interest Rate Risk

4.5

5.0

Credit Spread Risk

1.2

1.4

Foreign Exchange Risk

5.5

6.3

Commodity Risk

0.8

1.3

Equity Risk

-

-

Total

12.0

14.0

 

Non-trading

$million

$million

Interest Rate Risk

(0.1)

-

Credit Spread Risk

(0.7)

0.6

Equity Risk

0.1

-

Total

(0.7)

0.6

1      Reflects total product income which is the sum of client income and own account income. Includes elements of trading income, interest income and non funded income which are generated from Market Risk-related activities. Rates, XVA and Treasury income are included under Interest Rate Risk whilst Credit Trading income is included under Credit Spread Risk

Structural foreign exchange exposures

The table below sets out the principal structural foreign exchange exposures (net of investment hedges) of the Group.


2023
$million

20221

$million

Hong Kong dollar

4,662

3,333

Renminbi

3,523

3,497

Indian rupee

3,309

4,396

Singapore dollar

2,415

1,888

Korean won

2,114

2,409

Malaysian ringgit

1,540

1,571

Taiwanese dollar

1,222

1,055

Euro

1,125

893

Bangladeshi Taka

1,007

832

Thai baht

782

782

UAE dirham

709

670

Pakistani rupee

306

352

Indonesian rupiah

293

261

Other

3,206

3,233


26,213

25,172

1      Prior year has been represented to provide granular currency details



Page 57

As at 31 December 2023, the Group had taken net investment hedges using derivative financial instruments to partly cover its exposure to the Hong Kong dollar of $5,603 million (31 December 2022: $6,236 million), Korean won of $2,884 million (31 December 2022: $3,330 million), Indian rupee of $1,809 million (31 December 2022: $620 million), Renminbi of $1,516 million (31 December 2022: $1,608 million), UAE dirham of $1,470 million (31 December 2022: $1,334 million), Singapore dollar of $1,047 million (31 December 2022: $1,608 million), Taiwanese dollar of $1,025 million (31 December 2022: $1,075 million) and South African rand of $64 million (31 December 2022: $nil million). An analysis has been performed on these exposures to assess the impact of a 1 per cent fall in the US dollar exchange rates, adjusted to incorporate the impacts of correlations of these currencies to the US dollar. The impact on the positions above would be an increase of $260 million (31 December 2022: $421 million). Changes in the valuation of these positions are taken to reserves. For analysis of the Group's capital position and requirements, refer to the Capital Review.

Counterparty Credit Risk

Counterparty Credit Risk is the potential for loss in the event of the default of a derivative counterparty, after taking into account the value of eligible collaterals and risk mitigation techniques. The Group's counterparty credit exposures are included in the Credit Risk section.

Derivative financial instruments Credit Risk mitigation

The Group enters into master netting agreements, which in the event of default result in a single amount owed by or to the counterparty through netting the sum of the positive and negative mark-to-market values of applicable derivative transactions.

In addition, the Group enters into credit support annexes (CSAs) with counterparties where collateral is deemed a necessary or desirable mitigant to the exposure. Cash collateral includes collateral called under a variation margin process from counterparties if total uncollateralised mark-to-market exposure exceeds the threshold and minimum transfer amount specified in the CSA. With certain counterparties, the CSA is reciprocal and requires us to post collateral if the overall mark-to-market values of positions are in the counterparty's favour and exceed an agreed threshold.

Liquidity and Funding Risk

Liquidity and Funding Risk is the risk that the Group may not have sufficient stable or diverse sources of funding to meet its obligations as they fall due.

The Group's Liquidity and Funding Risk framework requires each country to ensure that it operates within predefined liquidity limits and remains in compliance with Group liquidity policies and practices, as well as local regulatory requirements.

The Group achieves this through a combination of setting Risk Appetite and associated limits, policy formation, risk measurement and monitoring, prudential and internal stress testing, governance and review.

Despite the challenging macroeconomic environment, the Group has maintained resilience and retained a robust liquidity position. The Group continues to focus on improving the quality and diversification of its funding mix and remains committed to supporting its clients.

Primary sources of funding (audited)

The Group's funding strategy is largely driven by its policy to maintain adequate liquidity at all times, in all geographic locations and for all currencies. This is done to ensure the Group can meet all of its obligations as they fall due. The Group's funding profile is therefore well diversified across different sources, maturities and currencies.

The Group's assets are funded predominantly by customer deposits, supplemented with wholesale funding, which is diversified by type and maturity.

The Group maintains access to wholesale funding markets in all major financial centres in which it operates. This seeks to ensure that the Group has market intelligence, maintains stable funding lines and can obtain optimal pricing when performing cashflow management activities.

In 2023, the Group issued approximately $8.1 billion of securities, all in the form of senior debt, from its holding company (HoldCo) Standard Chartered PLC (2022 $5.2 billion of senior debt securities, $0.75 billion of subordinated debt securities and $1.25 billion of Additional Tier 1 securities). In the next 12 months, approximately $8.5 billion of the Group's senior debt, subordinated debt and Additional Tier 1 securities in total are either falling due for repayment contractually or callable by the Group.

Page 58

Liquidity and Funding Risk metrics

The Group continually monitors key liquidity metrics, both on a country basis and consolidated across the Group.

The following liquidity and funding Board Risk Appetite metrics define the maximum amount and type of risk that the Group is willing to assume in pursuit of its strategy: liquidity coverage ratio (LCR), liquidity stress survival horizons, recovery capacity and net stable funding ratio (NSFR). In addition to the Board Risk Appetite, there are further limits that apply at Group and country level such as, external wholesale borrowing (WBE) and cross currency limits.

Liquidity coverage ratio (LCR)

The LCR is a regulatory requirement set to ensure the Group has sufficient unencumbered high-quality liquid assets to meet its liquidity needs in a 30-calendar-day liquidity stress scenario.

The Group monitors and reports its liquidity positions under the Liquidity Coverage Ratio per PRA rulebook and has maintained its LCR above the prudential requirement. The Group maintained strong liquidity ratios despite a challenging macroeconomic and geopolitical environment.

At the reporting date, the Group LCR was 145 per cent (31 December 2022: 147 per cent), with a surplus to both Board-approved Risk Appetite and regulatory requirements.

Adequate liquidity was held across our footprint to meet all local prudential LCR requirements where applicable.


2023
$million

2022
$million

Liquidity buffer

185,643

177,037

Total net cash outflows

128,111

120,720

Liquidity coverage ratio

145%

147%

Stress coverage

The Group intends to maintain a prudent and sustainable funding and liquidity position, in all countries and currencies, such that it can withstand a severe but plausible liquidity stress.

Our approach to managing liquidity and funding is reflected in the Board-level Risk Appetite Statement which includes the following:

"The Group should have sufficient stable and diverse sources of funding to meet its contractual and contingent obligations as they fall due."

The Group's internal liquidity stress testing framework covers the following stress scenarios:

Standard Chartered-specific - Captures the liquidity impact from an idiosyncratic event affecting Standard Chartered only with the rest of the market assumed to be operating normally.

Market wide - Captures the liquidity impact from a market-wide crisis affecting all participants in a country, region or globally.

Combined - Assumes both Standard Chartered-specific and market-wide events affect the Group simultaneously and hence is the most severe scenario.

All scenarios include, but are not limited to, modelled outflows for retail and wholesale funding, off-balance sheet funding risk, cross-currency funding risk, intraday risk, franchise risk and risks associated with a deterioration of a firm's credit rating. Concentration risk approach has been enhanced to capture single name and industry concentration.

Stress testing results show that a positive surplus was maintained under all scenarios at 31 December 2023, and respective countries were able to survive for a period of time as defined under each scenario. The results take into account currency convertibility and portability constraints while calculating the liquidity surplus at Group level.

Standard Chartered Bank's credit ratings as at 31 December 2023 were A+ with stable outlook (Fitch), A+ with stable outlook (S&P) and A1 with stable outlook (Moody's). As of 31 December 2023, the estimated contractual outflow of a three-notch long-term ratings downgrade is $1.1 billion.


Page 59

 

External wholesale borrowing

A risk limit is set to prevent excessive reliance on wholesale borrowing. Within the definition of wholesale borrowing, limits are applied to all branches and operating subsidiaries in the Group and as at the reporting date, the Group remained within the Risk Appetite.

Advances-to-deposits ratio

This is defined as the ratio of total loans and advances to customers relative to total customer deposits. An advances-to-deposits ratio below 100 per cent demonstrates that customer deposits exceed customer loans as a result of the emphasis placed on generating a high level of funding from customers.

The Group's advances-to-deposits ratio has decreased by 4.1 per cent to 53.3 per cent, driven by an increase in customer deposits of 3 per cent and with a reduction of 5 per cent in customer loans and advances. Deposits from customers as at 31 December 2023 are $486,666 million (31 December 2022: $473,383 million).


2023
$million

2022
$million

Total loans and advances to customers1,2

259,481

271,897

Total customer accounts3

486,666

473,383

Advances-to-deposits ratio

53.3%

57.4%

1      Excludes reverse repurchase agreement and other similar secured lending of $13,996 million and includes loans and advances to customers held at fair value through profit and loss of $7,212 million

2      Loans and advances to customers for the purpose of the advances-to-deposits ratio excludes $20,710 million of approved balances held with central banks, confirmed as repayable at the point of stress (31 December 2022: $20,798 million)

3      Includes customer accounts held at fair value through profit or loss of $17,248 million (31 December 2022: $11,706 million)


Page 60

Net stable funding ratio (NSFR)

The NSFR is a PRA regulatory requirement that stipulates institutions to maintain a stable funding profile in relation to an assumed duration of their assets and off-balance sheet activities over a one-year horizon. It is the ratio between the amount of available stable funding (ASF) and the amount of required stable funding (RSF). ASF factors are applied to balance sheet liabilities and capital, based on their perceived stability and the amount of stable funding they provide. Likewise, RSF factors are applied to assets and off-balance sheet exposures according to the amount of stable funding they require. The regulatory requirements for NSFR are to maintain a ratio of at least 100 per cent. The average ratio for the past four quarters is 136 per cent.

Liquidity pool

The liquidity value of the Group's LCR eligible liquidity pool at the reporting date was $186 billion. The figures in the table below account for haircuts, currency convertibility and portability constraints per PRA rules for transfer restrictions, and therefore are not directly comparable with the consolidated balance sheet. A liquidity pool is held to offset stress outflows as defined in the LCR per PRA rulebook.


2023

Asia
$million

Africa &
Middle East
$million

Europe &
Americas
$million

Total
$million

Level 1 securities





Cash and balances at central banks

32,504

2,456

46,715

81,675

Central banks, governments/public sector entities

54,562

1,363

15,843

71,768

Multilateral development banks and international organisations

5,202

961

10,754

16,917

Other

130

-

1,161

1,291

Total Level 1 securities

92,398

4,780

74,473

171,651

Level 2A securities

6,194

128

6,946

13,268

Level 2B securities

348

-

376

724

Total LCR eligible assets

98,940

4,908

81,795

185,643

 


2022

Asia
$million

Africa &
Middle East
$million

Europe &
Americas
$million

Total
$million

Level 1 securities





Cash and balances at central banks

34,101

1,066

36,522

71,689

Central banks, governments/public sector entities

50,881

2,712

23,680

77,273

Multilateral development banks and international organisations

3,510

837

10,843

15,190

Other

37

7

1,430

1,474

Total Level 1 securities

88,529

4,622

72,475

165,626

Level 2A securities

4,044

139

6,033

10,216

Level 2B securities

71

21

1,103

1,195

Total LCR eligible assets

92,644

4,782

79,611

177,037

 



Page 61

Liquidity analysis of the Group's balance sheet (audited)

Contractual maturity of assets and liabilities

The following table presents assets and liabilities by maturity groupings based on the remaining period to the contractual maturity date as at the balance sheet date on a discounted basis. Contractual maturities do not necessarily reflect actual repayments or cashflows.

Within the tables below, cash and balances with central banks, interbank placements and investment securities that are fair valued through other comprehensive income are used by the Group principally for liquidity management purposes.

As at the reporting date, assets remain predominantly short-dated, with 63 per cent maturing in less than one year. The less than six-month cumulative net funding gap improved by $35 billion as of 31 December 2023 compared to 31 December 2022.


2023

One month or less
$million

Between one month and three months
$million

Between three months and
six months
$million

Between six months and nine months
$million

Between
nine months and one year
$million

Between
one year
and two years
$million

Between
two years
and five years
$million

More than
five years
and undated
$million

Total
$million

Assets










Cash and balances at
central banks

63,752

-

-

-

-

-

-

6,153

69,905

Derivative financial instruments

12,269

10,632

6,910

3,611

2,921

4,650

6,038

3,403

50,434

Loans and advances
to banks1,2

28,814

23,384

10,086

4,929

5,504

1,583

2,392

1,098

77,790

Loans and advances
to customers1,2

86,695

55,009

25,492

15,392

14,537

25,987

26,545

95,829

345,486

Investment securities1

12,187

28,999

17,131

18,993

20,590

24,244

44,835

50,168

217,147

Other assets1

17,611

31,729

1,286

409

587

67

93

10,300

62,082

Total assets

221,328

149,753

60,905

43,334

44,139

56,531

79,903

166,951

822,844











Liabilities










Deposits by banks1,3

26,745

1,909

1,398

503

778

1,326

2,848

2

35,509

Customer accounts1,4

384,444

47,723

28,288

13,647

11,806

7,787

38,578

2,349

534,622

Derivative financial instruments

13,111

12,472

6,655

4,001

3,433

5,142

6,932

4,315

56,061

Senior debt5

130

1,111

1,537

1,389

624

11,507

20,127

14,443

50,868

Other debt securities in issue1

3,123

5,822

6,109

3,235

3,037

492

482

195

22,495

Other liabilities

14,929

26,447

1,695

544

883

1,830

1,809

12,763

60,900

Subordinated liabilities and other borrowed funds

980

68

19

172

453

312

1,936

8,096

12,036

Total liabilities

443,462

95,552

45,701

23,491

21,014

28,396

72,712

42,163

772,491

Net liquidity gap

(222,134)

54,201

15,204

19,843

23,125

28,135

7,191

124,788

50,353

1      Loans and advances, investment securities, deposits by banks, customer accounts and debt securities in issue include financial instruments held at fair value through profit or loss, see Note 13 Financial instruments

2      Loans and advances include reverse repurchase agreements and other similar secured lending of $97.6 billion

3      Deposits by banks include repurchase agreements and other similar secured borrowing of $5.6 billion

4      Customer accounts include repurchase agreements and other similar secured borrowing of $48.0 billion

5      Senior debt maturity profiles are based upon contractual maturity, which may be later than call options over the debt held by the Group

 

Page 62


2022

One month
or less
$million

Between one month and three months
$million

Between three months and
six months
$million

Between six months and nine months
$million

Between
nine months and one year
$million

Between
one year
and two years
$million

Between
two years
and five years
$million

More than
five years
and undated
$million

Total
$million

Assets










Cash and balances at
central banks

49,097

-

-

-

-

-

-

9,166

58,263

Derivative financial instruments

15,558

12,030

8,352

4,446

3,602

6,026

8,410

5,293

63,717

Loans and advances
to banks1,2

24,135

15,293

11,595

4,971

4,138

2,608

1,022

687

64,449

Loans and advances
to customers1,2

96,351

58,605

27,751

12,540

13,444

19,150

33,413

96,476

357,730

Investment securities1

14,175

26,008

23,364

13,024

12,891

22,805

41,217

52,756

206,240

Other assets1

15,210

31,276

1,341

181

698

89

23

20,705

69,523

Total assets

214,526

143,212

72,403

35,162

34,773

50,678

84,085

185,083

819,922











Liabilities










Deposits by banks1,3

29,733

2,042

2,245

871

349

1,432

144

7

36,823

Customer accounts1,4

402,069

49,769

25,110

15,961

15,216

7,830

2,451

1,823

520,229

Derivative financial instruments

15,820

15,810

8,645

5,002

4,102

6,795

7,904

5,784

69,862

Senior debt5

204

342

509

963

711

5,855

19,673

12,086

40,343

Other debt securities in issue1

2,758

5,504

8,732

7,316

2,935

1,088

870

268

29,471

Other liabilities

19,857

24,725

1,616

521

503

902

1,043

10,296

59,463

Subordinated liabilities and other borrowed funds

2,004

105

22

248

25

1,882

2,045

7,384

13,715

Total liabilities

472,445

98,297

46,879

30,882

23,841

25,784

34,130

37,648

769,906

Net liquidity gap

(257,919)

44,915

25,524

4,280

10,932

24,894

49,955

147,435

50,016

1      Loans and advances, investment securities, other assets, deposits by banks, customer accounts and debt securities in issue include financial instruments held at fair value through profit or loss, see Note 13 Financial instruments

2      Loans and advances include reverse repurchase agreements and other similar secured lending of $90 billion

3      Deposits by banks include repurchase agreements and other similar secured borrowing of $7.0 billion

4      Customer accounts include repurchase agreements and other similar secured borrowing of $46.8 billion

5      Senior debt maturity profiles are based upon contractual maturity, which may be later than call options over the debt held by the Group

Behavioural maturity of financial assets and liabilities

The cashflows presented in the previous section reflect the cashflows that will be contractually payable over the residual maturity of the instruments. However, contractual maturities do not necessarily reflect the timing of actual repayments or cashflow. In practice, certain assets and liabilities behave differently from their contractual terms, especially for short-term customer accounts, credit card balances and overdrafts, which extend to a longer period than their contractual maturity. On the other hand, mortgage balances tend to have a shorter repayment period than their contractual maturity date. Expected customer behaviour is assessed and managed on a country basis using qualitative and quantitative techniques, including analysis of observed customer behaviour over time.

Maturity of financial liabilities on an undiscounted basis (audited)

The following table analyses the contractual cashflows payable for the Group's financial liabilities by remaining contractual maturities on an undiscounted basis. The financial liability balances in the table below will not agree with the balances reported in the consolidated balance sheet as the table incorporates all contractual cashflows, on an undiscounted basis, relating to both principal and interest payments. Derivatives not treated as hedging derivatives are included in the 'On demand' time bucket and not by contractual maturity.

Within the 'More than five years and undated' maturity band are undated financial liabilities, the majority of which relate to subordinated debt, on which interest payments are not included as this information would not be meaningful, given the instruments are undated. Interest payments on these instruments are included within the relevant maturities up to five years.



Page 63


2023

One month
or less
$million

Between one month and three months
$million

Between three months and
six months
$million

Between six months and nine months
$million

Between
nine months and one year
$million

Between
one year
and two years
$million

Between
two years
and five years
$million

More than
five years
and undated
$million

Total
$million

Deposits by banks

26,759

1,921

1,417

513

790

1,328

2,848

4

35,580

Customer accounts

385,361

48,140

28,763

14,049

12,190

8,118

39,000

3,036

538,657

Derivative financial instruments

53,054

517

46

44

103

202

887

1,208

56,061

Debt securities in issue

3,507

6,995

8,015

5,070

4,002

13,663

23,413

16,396

81,061

Subordinated liabilities and other borrowed funds

1,043

134

46

208

570

395

2,389

14,367

19,152

Other liabilities

12,200

26,291

1,560

515

884

1,832

1,810

11,513

56,605

Total liabilities

481,924

83,998

39,847

20,399

18,539

25,538

70,347

46,524

787,116

 


2022

One month
or less
$million

Between one month and three months
$million

Between three months and
six months
$million

Between six months and nine months
$million

Between
nine months and one year
$million

Between
one year
and two years
$million

Between
two years
and five years
$million

More than
five years
and undated
$million

Total
$million

Deposits by banks

29,742

2,048

2,275

876

362

1,455

144

8

36,910

Customer accounts

401,893

49,196

24,713

15,614

15,283

8,280

5,937

2,591

523,507

Derivative financial instruments

65,912

48

12

116

213

940

1,185

1,436

69,862

Debt securities in issue

3,060

5,912

9,631

8,574

3,979

7,844

22,259

18,465

79,724

Subordinated liabilities and other borrowed funds

2,097

165

44

273

28

2,029

2,610

14,004

21,250

Other liabilities

17,275

25,751

1,517

504

496

895

901

9,669

57,008

Total liabilities

519,979

83,120

38,192

25,957

20,361

21,443

33,036

46,173

788,261

Interest Rate Risk in the Banking Book

The following table provides the estimated impact to a hypothetical base case projection of the Group's earnings under the following scenarios:

A 50 basis point parallel interest rate shock (up and down) to the current market-implied path of rates, across all yield curves

A 100 basis point parallel interest rate shock (up and down) to the current market-implied path of rates, across all yield curves

These interest rate shock scenarios assume all other economic variables remain constant. The sensitivities shown represent the estimated change to a hypothetical base case projected net interest income (NII), plus the change in interest rate implied income and expense from FX swaps used to manage banking book currency positions, under the different interest rate shock scenarios.

The base case projected NII is based on the current market-implied path of rates and forward rate expectations. The NII sensitivities below stress this base case by a further 50 or 100bps. Actual observed interest rate changes will lag behind market expectation. Accordingly, the shocked NII sensitivity does not represent a forecast of the Group's net interest income.

The interest rate sensitivities are indicative stress tests and based on simplified scenarios, estimating the aggregate impact of an unanticipated, instantaneous parallel shock across all yield curves over a one-year horizon, including the time taken to implement changes to pricing before becoming effective. The assessment assumes that the size and mix of the balance sheet remain constant and that there are no specific management actions in response to the change in rates. No assumptions are made in relation to the impact on credit spreads in a changing rate environment.

Page 64

Significant modelling and behavioural assumptions are made regarding scenario simplification, market competition, pass-through rates, asset and liability re-pricing tenors, and price flooring. In particular, the assumption that interest rates of all currencies and maturities shift by the same amount concurrently, and that no actions are taken to mitigate the impacts arising from this are considered unlikely. Reported sensitivities will vary over time due to a number of factors including changes in balance sheet composition, market conditions, customer behaviour and risk management strategy. Therefore, while the NII sensitivities are a relevant measure of the Group's interest rate exposure, they should not be considered an income or profit forecast.

Estimated one-year impact to earnings from
a parallel shift in yield curves at the beginning
of the period of:

2023

USD bloc
$million

HKD bloc
$million

SGD bloc
$million

KRW bloc
$million

CNY bloc
$million

Other
currency bloc
$million

Total
$million

+ 50 basis points

90

10

50

10

30

160

350

- 50 basis points

(150)

(30)

(50)

(20)

(40)

(180)

(470)









+ 100 basis points

180

10

100

20

60

320

690

- 100 basis points

(280)

(40)

(100)

(40)

(80)

(350)

(890)

 

Estimated one-year impact to earnings from
a parallel shift in yield curves at the beginning
of the period of:

2022

USD bloc
$million

HKD bloc
$million

SGD bloc
$million

KRW bloc
$million

CNY bloc
$million

Other
currency bloc
$million

Total
$million

+ 50 basis points

80

20

40

50

30

150

370

- 50 basis points

(80)

(20)

(40)

(60)

(30)

(140)

(370)









+ 100 basis points

160

40

90

100

50

300

740

As at 31 December 2023, the Group estimates the one-year impact of an instantaneous, parallel increase across all yield curves of 50 basis points to increase projected NII by $350 million. The equivalent impact from a parallel decrease of 50 basis points would result in a reduction in projected NII of $470 million. The Group estimates the one-year impact of an instantaneous, parallel increase across all yield curves of 100 basis points to increase projected NII by $690 million. The equivalent impact from a parallel decrease of 100 basis points would result in a reduction in projected NII of $890 million.

The benefit from rising interest rates is primarily from reinvesting at higher yields and from assets re-pricing faster and to a greater extent than deposits. NII sensitivity in falling rate scenarios has increased versus 31 December 2022, due to changes in modelling assumptions to reflect expected re-pricing activity on Retail and Transaction Banking current accounts and savings accounts in the current interest rate environment.

Over the course of 2023 the size of the interest rate swaps and HTC-accounted bond portfolios used to programmatically hedge the behavioural lives of structural equity and CASA balances increased from $31 billion to $47 billion. The portfolios had a weighted average maturity of 2.9 years, which reflects the behaviouralised lives of the rate-insensitive deposit and equity balances that they hedge, and a yield of 3.1%, as at 31 December 2023.

Operational and Technology Risk

The Group defines Operational and Technology risk as the potential for loss from inadequate or failed internal processes, technology events, human error, or from the impact of external events (including legal risks). Operational and Technology risk may occur anywhere in the Group, including third-party processes.

Operational and Technology risk profile

Risk management practices help the business grow safely and ensure governance and management of Operational and Technology risk through the delivery and embedding of effective frameworks and policies, together with continuous oversight and assurance. Managing Operational and Technology risk makes the Group more efficient and enables it to offer better, sustainable service to its customers. The Group's Operational and Technology Risk Type Framework ('O&T RTF') is designed to enable the Group to govern, identify, measure, monitor and test, manage and report on its Operational and Technology risks. The Group continues to ensure the O&T RTF supports the business and the functions in effectively managing risk and controls within risk appetite to meet their strategic objectives.



Page 65

The Group has demonstrated progress on ensuring visibility of risks and risk management through implementation of a standardised risk taxonomy. Standardising the risk taxonomy enables improved risk aggregation and reporting as well as providing opportunities for simplifying the process of risk identification and assessment. A revised process universe along with taxonomies for causes and controls have been designed and will be implemented in 2024, with control categories supporting the streamlining and removal of duplicate controls, reducing complexity, and improving

risk and control management. Macro processes will provide a client-centric view and enable clearer accountability for delivery as well as management of risks in line with business objectives.

Operational and Technology risk is elevated in areas such as Information and Cyber Security, Data Management and Transaction Processing. Other key areas of focus are Change, Systems Health/Technology risk, Third Party risk, Resilience and Regulatory Compliance. Management has focused on addressing these areas, improving the sustainable operating environment and has initiated a number of programmes to enhance the control environment. The Group continues to monitor and manage Operational and Technology risks associated with the external environment such as geopolitical factors and the increasing risk of cyber-attacks. Digitalisation and inappropriate use of Artificial Intelligence, various regulatory expectations across our footprint and the changing technology landscape remain key emerging areas to manage, allowing the Group to keep pace with new business developments, whilst ensuring that risk and control frameworks evolve accordingly. The Group continues to strengthen its risk management to understand the full spectrum of risks in the operating environment, enhance its defences and improve resilience.

Operational and Technology risk events and losses

Operational losses are one indicator of the effectiveness and robustness of the non-financial risk control environment.

The Group's profile of operational loss events in 2023 and 2022 is summarised in the table below, which shows the distribution of gross operational losses by Basel business line.

Distribution of Operational Losses by Basel business line

% Loss

2023

2022¹

Agency Services

1.8%

3.0%

Asset Management

0.1%

0.8%

Commercial Banking

8.4%

8.9%

Corporate Finance

7.6%

1.1%

Corporate Items

35.5%

2.5%

Payment and Settlements

17.6%

42.9%

Retail Banking

20.3%

25.5%

Retail Brokerage

0.0%

0.0%

Trading and Sales

8.5%

15.2%

1      Losses in 2022 have been restated to include incremental events recognised in 2023

The Group's profile of operational loss events in 2023 and 2022 is also summarised by Basel event type in the table below. It shows the distribution of gross operational losses by Basel event type.

Distribution of Operational Losses by Basel event type

% Loss

2023

20221

Business disruption and system failures

6.0%

3.5%

Clients' products and business practices

3.6%

7.1%

Damage to physical assets

0.0%

0.0%

Employment practices and workplace safety

0.6%

0.2%

Execution delivery and process management

75.0%

79.6%

External fraud

14.6%

8.6%

Internal fraud

0.2%

0.9%

1      Losses in 2022 have been restated to include incremental events recognised in 2023

Other principal risks

Losses arising from operational failures for other principal and integrated risks are reported as operational losses. Operational losses do not include operational risk-related credit impairments.



Page 66

Enterprise Risk Management Framework

Risk management is at the heart of banking, it is what we do. Managing risk effectively is how we drive commerce and prosperity for our clients and our communities, and it is how we grow sustainably and profitably as an organisation.

Effective risk management is essential in delivering consistent and sustainable performance for all our stakeholders and is a central part of the financial and operational management of the Group. The Group adds value to clients and the communities in which they operate by balancing risk and reward to generate returns for shareholders.

The Enterprise Risk Management Framework (ERMF) enables the Group to manage enterprise-wide risks, with the objective of maximising risk-adjusted returns while remaining within our Risk Appetite (RA). The ERMF is embedded across the Group, including its branches and subsidiaries1, and is reviewed annually. The latest version is effective from January 2024.

Annual review

In the 2023 review, the concepts of Integrated Risk Types (IRTs) and IRT Owner roles were discontinued. Oversight on IRTs, i.e. Climate Risk, Digital Assets and Third Party Risk, is provided through the Risk Type Frameworks (RTFs) and relevant dedicated policies. The subject matter experts as policy owners for these risks provide overall governance and a holistic view of how risks are monitored and managed across the Principal Risk Types (PRTs).

Risk culture

Risk culture encompasses our general awareness, attitudes, and behaviours towards risk, as well as how risk is managed at enterprise level.

A healthy risk culture is one in which everyone takes personal responsibility to identify and assess, openly discuss, and take prompt action to address existing and emerging risks. We expect those in our control functions to provide oversight and challenge constructively, collaboratively, and in a timely manner. This effort is reflected in our valued behaviours, underpinned by our Code of Conduct and Ethics, and reinforced by how we hire, develop, reward our people, serve our clients, and contribute to communities around the world.

The risks we face constantly evolve, and we must always look for ways to manage them as effectively as possible. While unfavourable outcomes will occur from time to time, a healthy risk culture means that we react quickly and transparently. We can then take the opportunity to learn from our experience and improve our framework and processes.

Strategic risk management

The Group's approach to strategic risk management includes the following:

Risk identification: impact analyses of risks that arise from the Group's growth plans, strategic initiatives, and business model vulnerabilities are reviewed. This assesses how existing risks have evolved in terms of relative importance or whether new risks have emerged.

Risk Appetite: impact analysis is performed to assess if strategic initiatives can be achieved within RA and highlight areas where additional RA should be considered.

Stress testing: the risks highlighted during the strategy review and other risk identification processes are used to develop scenarios for enterprise stress tests. In order to ensure that the Group's Strategy remains within the approved RA, the Group Chief Risk Officer (GCRO) and Group Chief Financial Officer (GCFO) recommend strategic actions based on the stress test results.



Page 67

Roles and responsibilities

Senior Managers Regime2

Roles and responsibilities under the ERMF are aligned to the objectives of the Senior Managers Regime (SMR). The GCRO is responsible for the overall development and maintenance of the Group's ERMF and for identifying material risks which the Group may be exposed to. The GCRO delegates effective implementation of the RTFs to Risk Framework Owners (RFO) who provide second line of defence oversight for their respective PRTs.

In addition, the GCRO is the senior manager responsible for the development of the Group's Digital Assets Risk Assessment Approach, and management of Climate Risk.

1      The Group's ERMF and System of Internal Control applies only to wholly controlled subsidiaries of the Group, and not to Associates, Joint Ventures or Structured Entities of the Group.

2      Senior managers refers to individuals designated as senior management functions under the FCA and PRA Senior Managers Regime.

The Risk function

The Risk function provides oversight and challenge on the Group's risk management, ensuring that business is conducted in line with regulatory expectations. The GCRO directly manages the Risk function, which is independent from the origination, trading, and sales functions of the businesses. The Risk function is responsible for:

Determining the RA for approval by Group's Management Team (GMT) and the Board.

Maintaining the ERMF, ensuring that it remains relevant and appropriate to the Group's business activities, and is effectively communicated and implemented across the Group.

Ensuring that risks are properly assessed, risk and return decisions are transparent and risks are controlled in accordance with the Group's standards and RA.

Overseeing and challenging the management of PRTs under the ERMF.

Ensuring that the necessary balance in making risk and return decisions is not compromised by short-term pressures to generate revenues through the independence of the Risk function.

In addition, the Risk function provides specialist capabilities relevant to risk management processes in the broader organisation.

The Risk function supports the Group's strategy by building a sustainable ERMF that places regulatory and compliance standards, together with culture of appropriate conduct, at the forefront of the Group's agenda.

Our Conduct, Financial Crime and Compliance (CFCC) function works alongside the Risk function within the ERMF to deliver a unified second line of defence.

Three lines of defence model

The Group applies a three line of defence model to its day-to-day activities for effective risk management, and to reinforce a strong governance and control environment. Typically:

The businesses and functions engaged in or supporting revenue generating activities that own and manage the risks constitute the first line of defence.

The control functions, independent of the first line of defence, that provide oversight and challenge of risk management activities act as the second line of defence.

Internal Audit acts as the third line of defence providing independent assurance on the effectiveness of controls supporting the activities of the first and second line of defence functions.



Page 68

Risk Appetite and profile

The Group recognises the following constraints which determine the risks that we are willing to take in pursuit of our strategy and the development of a sustainable business:

Risk capacity is the maximum level of risk the Group can assume, given its current capabilities and resources, before breaching constraints determined by capital and liquidity requirements or the internal operational environment, or otherwise failing to meet the expectations of regulator and law enforcement agencies.

RA is defined by the Group and approved by the Board. It is the boundary for the risk that the Group is willing to undertake to achieve its strategic objectives and Corporate Plan.

The Board is responsible for approving the RA Statements, which are underpinned by a set of financial and operational control parameters known as RA metrics and their associated thresholds. These directly constrain the aggregate risk exposures that can be taken across the Group.

The Group RA is reviewed at least annually to ensure that it is fit for purpose and aligned with strategy, with focus given to new or emerging risks.

Risk Appetite Framework

The Group RA is defined in accordance with risk management principles that inform our overall approach to risk management and our risk culture. We set RA to enable us to grow sustainably whilst managing our risks, giving confidence to our stakeholders.

The Group RA is supplemented by risk control tools such as granular-level limits, policies, standards, and other operational control parameters that are used to maintain the Group's risk profile within approved RA.

Risk Appetite Statement

The Group will not compromise compliance with its Risk Appetite in order to pursue revenue growth or higher returns.

See Table 1 for the set of RA statements.

Risk identification and assessment

Identification and assessment of potentially adverse risk events is an essential first step in managing the risks of any business or activity. To ensure consistency in communication, we use PRTs to classify our risk exposures.

We also recognise the need to maintain a holistic perspective since:

a single transaction or activity may give rise to multiple types of risk exposure;

risk concentrations may arise from multiple exposures that are closely correlated; and

a given risk exposure may change its form from one risk type to another.

There are also sources of risk that arise beyond our own operations, such as the Group's dependency on suppliers for the provision of services and technology.

As the Group remains accountable for risks arising from the actions of such third parties, failure to adequately monitor and manage these relationships could materially impact the Group's ability to operate.

The Group maintains a dynamic risk-scanning process with inputs on the internal and external risk environment, as well as potential threats and opportunities from the business and client perspectives. The Group maintains a taxonomy of the PRTs, and risk sub-types; as well as the Topical and Emerging Risks (TERs) inventory that includes near-term as well as longer-term uncertainties. Risk assessments of planned growth and strategic initiatives against the Group's RA is undertaken annually.

The GCRO and the Group Risk Committee (GRC) regularly review reports on the risk profile for the PRTs, adherence to Group RA and the Group risk inventory, including TERs. They use this information to escalate material developments and make recommendations to the Board annually on any potential changes to our Corporate Plan.

Page 69

Stress testing

The objective of stress testing is to support the Group in assessing that it:

does not have a portfolio with excessive risk concentration that could produce unacceptably high losses under severe but plausible scenarios;

has sufficient financial resources to withstand severe but plausible scenarios;

has the financial flexibility to respond to extreme but plausible scenarios;

understands key business model risks and considers what kind of event might crystallise those risks - even if extreme and with a low likelihood of occurring;

Identify, as required, actions to mitigate the likelihood or impact of those events;

considers how the outcome of plausible stress events, including TERs, may impact availability of liquidity and regulatory capital; and

has set RA metrics at appropriate levels.

Enterprise stress tests incorporate Capital and Liquidity Adequacy Stress Tests, including recovery and resolution, as well as reverse stress tests.

Stress tests are performed at the Group, country, business, and portfolio level under a wide range of risks and at varying degrees of severity. Unless specifically set by the regulator, scenario design is a bespoke process that aims to explore risks that can adversely impact the Group.

The Board delegates approval of the Bank of England (BoE) stress test submissions to the Board Risk Committee (BRC), which reviews the recommendations from the GRC. Based on the stress test results, the GCFO and GCRO can recommend strategic actions to the Board to ensure that the Group's strategy remains within RA.

In addition, analysis is run at PRT level to assess specific risks and concentrations that the Group may be exposed to. These include qualitative assessments such as stressing of credit sectors or portfolios, measures such as Value at Risk (VaR) and multi-factor scenarios in Traded Risk and internal stressed liquidity metrics. Non-financial risk types are also stressed to assess the necessary capital requirements under the Operational & Technology RTF.

The Group has also undertaken a number of Climate Risk stress tests, both those mandated by regulators as well as management scenarios.



Page 70

Principal Risk Types

PRTs are those risks that are inherent in our strategy and business model and have been formally defined in the Group's ERMF. These risks are managed through distinct RTFs which are approved by the GCRO.

The PRTs and associated RA Statements are reviewed annually.

The table below shows the Group's current PRTs.

Table 1: Principal Risk Types Definition and RA Statement

Principal Risk Types

Definition

Risk Appetite Statement

Credit Risk

Potential for loss due to failure of a counterparty to meet its agreed obligations to pay the Group.

The Group manages its credit exposures following the principle of diversification across products, geographies, client segments and industry sectors.

Traded Risk

Potential for loss resulting from activities undertaken by the Group in financial markets.

The Group should control its financial markets and activities to ensure that market and counterparty credit risk losses do not cause material damage to the Group's franchise.

Treasury Risk

Potential for insufficient capital, liquidity, or funding to support our operations, the risk of reductions in earnings or value from movements in interest rates impacting banking book items and the potential for losses from a shortfall in the Group's pension plans.

The Group should maintain sufficient capital, liquidity and funding to support its operations, and an interest rate profile ensuring that the reductions in earnings or value from movements in interest rates impacting banking book items does not cause material damage to the Group's franchise. In addition, the Group should ensure its pension plans are adequately funded.

Operational and Technology Risk

Potential for loss resulting from inadequate or failed internal processes, technology events, human error, or from the impact of external events (including legal risks).

The Group aims to control operational and technology risks to ensure that operational losses (financial or reputational), including any related to conduct of business matters, do not cause material damage to the Group's franchise.

Financial Crime Risk1

Potential for legal or regulatory penalties, material financial loss or reputational damage resulting from the failure to comply with applicable laws and regulations relating to international sanctions, anti-money laundering and anti-bribery and corruption, and fraud.

The Group has no appetite for breaches in laws and regulations related to Financial Crime, recognising that whilst incidents are unwanted, they cannot be entirely avoided.

Compliance Risk

Potential for penalties or loss to the Group or for an adverse impact to our clients, stakeholders or to the integrity of the markets we operate in through a failure on our part to comply with laws, or regulations.

The Group has no appetite for breaches in laws and regulations related to regulatory non-compliance; recognising that whilst incidents are unwanted, they cannot be entirely avoided.

Information and Cyber Security Risk

Risk to the Group's assets, operations, and individuals due to the potential for unauthorised access, use, disclosure, disruption, modification, or destruction of information assets and/or information systems.

The Group aims to mitigate and control ICS risks to ensure that incidents do not cause the Bank material harm, business disruption, financial loss or reputational damage - recognising that whilst incidents are unwanted, they cannot be entirely avoided.

Reputational and Sustainability Risk

Potential for damage to the franchise (such as loss of trust, earnings or market capitalisation), because of stakeholders taking a negative view of the Group through actual or perceived actions or inactions, including a failure to uphold responsible business conduct as we strive to do no significant environmental and social harm through our client, third party relationships, or our own operations.

The Group aims to protect the franchise from material damage to its reputation by ensuring that any business activity is satisfactorily assessed and managed with the appropriate level of management and governance oversight. This includes a potential failure to uphold responsible business conduct in striving to do no significant environmental and social harm.

Model Risk

Potential loss that may occur because of decisions or the risk of mis-estimation that could be principally based on the output of models, due to errors in the development, implementation, or use of such models.

The Group has no appetite for material adverse implications arising from misuse of models or errors in the development or implementation of models; whilst accepting some model uncertainty.

1      Fraud forms part of the Financial Crime RA Statement but in line with market practice does not apply a zero-tolerance approach

In addition to the PRTs, there is a RA statement for Climate Risk: "The Group aims to measure and manage financial and non-financial risks arising from climate change, and reduce emissions related to our own activities and those related to the financing of clients in alignment with the Paris Agreement."



Page 71

ERMF effectiveness reviews

The GCRO is responsible for annually affirming the effectiveness of the ERMF to the BRC via an effectiveness review. This review uses evidence-based self-assessments for all the RTFs and relevant policies. A top-down review and challenge of the results is conducted by the GCRO with all RFOs and an opinion on the internal control environment is provided by Group Internal Audit.

The ERMF effectiveness review enables measurement of year-on-year progress. The key outcomes of the 2023 review are:

Continued focus on embedding the ERMF across the organisation.

Financial risks continue to be more effectively managed and the Group continues to make good progress in embedding non-financial risk management.

Other aspects of the ERMF, including the key risk committees and key supporting standards, are established.

Country-led self-assessments ensure adherence to the ERMF. Country and regional risk committees continue to play an active role in managing and overseeing material issues arising in countries.

Ongoing ffectiveness reviews allow for a structured approach to identify improvement opportunities and build plans to address them.

In 2024, the Group aims to further strengthen its risk management practices by improving the management of non-financial risks within its businesses, functions and across our footprint.

Executive and Board risk oversight

Overview

The Board has ultimate responsibility for risk management and is supported by five core Board level committees. The Board approves the ERMF based on the recommendation from the BRC, which also recommends the Group RA Statement for all PRTs. In addition, the Culture and Sustainability Committee oversees the Group's culture and key sustainability priorities.

Board and Executive level risk committee governance structure

The Committee governance structure below presents the view as of 2023.

Group Risk Committee

The GRC, which derives its authority from the GCRO, is responsible for ensuring the effective management of risk throughout the Group in support of the Group's strategy. The GCRO chairs the GRC, whose members are drawn from the Group Management Team. The GRC oversees the effective implementation of the ERMF for the Group, including the delegation of any part of its authorities to appropriate individuals or sub-committees.

Group Risk Committee sub-committees

The Group Non-Financial Risk Committee (GNFRC), chaired by the Global Head, Risk, Functions and Operational Risk, governs the non-financial risks throughout the Group, in support of the ERMF and the Group's strategy. The GNFRC also reviews the adequacy of the internal control system across in-scope PRTs.

The Group Financial Crime Risk Committee (GFCRC), chaired by the Group Head, CFCC, governs the Financial Crime Risk Type (excluding Fraud Risk and Secondary Reputational Risk arising from Financial Crime Risk). The GFCRC ensures that the Financial Crime Risk profile is managed within RA and policies.

The Group Responsibility and Reputational Risk Committee (GRRRC), chaired by the Group Head, CFCC, ensures the effective management of Reputational and Sustainability Risk across the Group. This includes providing oversight of matters arising from clients, products, transactions and strategic coverage-related decisions and matters escalated by the respective RFOs.

The International Financial Reporting Standards (IFRS) 9 Impairment Committee, co-chaired by the Global Head Enterprise Risk Management (ERM) and Group Head, Central Finance, ensures the effective management of Expected Credit Loss (ECL) computations, as well as stage allocation of financial assets for quarterly financial reporting.



 

The Model Risk Committee, chaired by the Global Head, ERM, ensures the effective measurement and management of Model Risk in line with internal policies and RA.

Page 72

The Corporate, Commercial and Institutional Banking (CCIB) Risk Committee, chaired by the Chief Risk Officer (CRO), CCIB and Europe and Americas, ensures the effective management of risk throughout CCIB in support of the Group's strategy.

The Consumer, Private and Business Banking (CPBB) Risk Committee, chaired by the CRO, CPBB, ensures the effective management of risk throughout CPBB in support of the Group's strategy.

The Asia Risk Committee and the Africa and Middle East Risk Committee are chaired by the CRO for the respective region. These committees ensure the effective management of risk in the regions in support of the Group's strategy.

The Investment Committee, chaired by representatives from the Risk function (CRO, Stressed Asset Group (SAG), Chief Credit Officer), ensures the optimised wind-down of the Group's existing direct investment activities in equities, quasi-equities (excluding mezzanine), funds and other alternative investments (excluding debt/debt-like instruments). This includes equity or quasi-equity stakes obtained as a result of restructuring of distressed debt, non-core equities and limited partner investments in funds linked to CCIB and managed by the Credit and Portfolio Management.

The SC Ventures (SCV) Risk Committee, chaired by the CRO, SCV, receives authority directly from the GCRO and oversees the effective management of risk throughout SCV and the portfolio of subsidiaries operating under SCV, in support of the Group's strategy.

The Climate Risk Management Committee (CRMC), chaired by the Global Head, ERM, oversees the effective implementation of the Group's Climate Risk Policy and workplan. This includes relevant regulatory requirements and covers Climate Risk related financial and non-financial risks.

The Regulatory Interpretation Committee, co-chaired by the Global Head ERM and Group Head, Central Finance, provides oversight of material regulatory interpretations for the Capital Requirements Regulation (as amended by UK legislation), the Prudential Regulatory Authority (PRA) rulebook and other relevant regulations impacting Group regulatory capital calculations and reporting. The areas and risk types in scope are credit risk, traded risk, operational risk, large exposures, leverage ratio and securitisation.

The Digital Assets Risk Committee, chaired by the Global Head, ERM, oversees effective risk management of the Digital Assets (DA) Risk profile of the Group. This includes providing oversight and subject matter expertise of DA Risk matters arising from DA-related activities across the PRTs.

Group Asset and Liability Committee

The Group Asset and Liability Committee (GALCO) is chaired by the GCFO. Its members are drawn principally from the Management Team. GALCO is responsible for determining the Group's balance sheet strategy and for ensuring that, in executing the Group's strategy, the Group operates within RA and regulatory requirements relating to capital, loss-absorbing capacity, liquidity, leverage, Interest Rate Risk in the Banking Book (IRRBB), Banking Book Basis Risk and Structural Foreign Exchange Risk. It also monitors the structural impact of decisions around sustainable finance, net zero and climate risk. GALCO is also responsible for ensuring that internal and external recovery planning requirements are met.



 

Page 73

Principal risks

We manage and control our PRTs through distinct RTFs, policies and RA.

Credit Risk

The Group defines Credit Risk as the potential for loss due to failure of a counterparty to meet its agreed obligations to pay the Group.

Risk Appetite Statement

The Group manages its credit exposures following the principle of diversification across products, geographies, client segments and industry sectors.

Roles and responsibilities

The Credit RTF for the Group are set and owned by the CROs for the respective business segments.

The Credit Risk control function is the second line of defence responsible for independent challenge, monitoring and oversight of the Credit Risk management practices of the first line of defence. In addition, they ensure that credit risks are properly assessed and transparent; and that credit decisions are controlled in accordance with the Group's RA, credit policies and standards.

Mitigation

Segment-specific policies for CCIB and CPBB are in place for the management of Credit Risk. The Credit Policy for CCIB Client Coverage sets the principles that must be followed for the end-to-end credit process, including credit initiation, credit grading, credit assessment, product structuring, credit risk mitigation, monitoring and control, and documentation.

The CPBB Credit Risk Management Policy sets the principles for the management of CPBB segments, for end-to-end credit process including credit initiation, credit assessment, documentation and monitoring for lending to these segments.

The Group also sets out standards for the eligibility, enforceability, and effectiveness of Credit Risk mitigation arrangements. Potential credit losses from a given account, client or portfolio are mitigated using a range of tools, such as collateral, netting agreements, credit insurance, credit derivatives and guarantees.

Risk mitigants are also carefully assessed for their market value, legal enforceability, correlation, and counterparty risk of the protection provider.

Collateral is valued prior to drawdown and regularly thereafter as required, to reflect current market conditions, the probability of recovery and the period of time to realise the collateral in the event of liquidation. The Group also seeks to diversify its collateral holdings across asset classes and markets.

Where guarantees, credit insurance, standby letters of credit or credit derivatives are used as Credit Risk mitigation, the creditworthiness of the protection provider is assessed and monitored using the same credit approval process applied to the obligor.

Governance committee oversight

At Board level, the BRC oversees the effective management of Credit Risk. At the executive level, the GRC oversees and appoints sub-committees for the management of all risk types including Credit Risk - in particular the CCIB Risk Committee, CPBB Risk Committee, Asia Risk Committee, and Africa and Middle East Risk Committee. The GRC also receives reports from other key Group Committees such as the Standard Chartered Bank Executive Risk Committee (in relation to Credit Risk).

These committees are responsible for overseeing all risk profiles including Credit Risk of the Group within the respective business areas and regions. Meetings are held regularly, and the committees monitor all material Credit Risk exposures, as well as key internal developments and external trends, ensuring that appropriate action is taken where necessary.



Page 74

Decision-making authorities and delegation

The Credit RTF is the formal mechanism of delegating Credit Risk authorities cascading from the GCRO, as the Senior Manager of the Credit Risk PRT. The delegation is to individuals such as the business segments' CROs. Further delegation of credit authorities to individual credit officers may be undertaken based on risk-adjusted scales by customer type or portfolio.

Credit Risk authorities are reviewed at least annually to ensure that they remain appropriate. In CCIB Client Coverage, the individuals delegating the Credit Risk authorities perform oversight by reviewing a sample of the limit applications approved by the delegated credit officers periodically. In CPBB, where credit decision systems and tools (e.g. application scorecards) are used for credit decisioning, such risk models are subject to performance monitoring and periodic validation. Where manual or discretionary credit decisions are applied, the individuals delegating the Credit Risk authorities perform periodic quality control assessments and assurance checks.

Monitoring

The Group regularly monitors credit exposures, portfolio performance, external trends and emerging risks that may impact risk management outcomes. Internal risk management reports that are presented to risk committees contain information on key political and economic trends across major portfolios and countries, portfolio delinquency and loan impairment performance.

In CCIB Client Coverage, clients and portfolios are subject to additional review when they display signs of actual or potential weakness; for example, where there is a decline in the client's position within the industry, financial deterioration, a breach of covenants, or non-performance of an obligation within the stipulated period. Such accounts are subject to a dedicated process overseen by the Credit Issues Committee in the relevant countries where client account strategies and credit grades are re-evaluated. In addition, remedial actions, including placing accounts on early alert for increased scrutiny, exposure reduction, security enhancement or exiting the account could be undertaken. Certain accounts could also be transferred into the control management of the SAG, which is our specialist recovery unit for CCIB Client Coverage that operates independently from our main business.

On an annual basis, senior members from Business and Risk participate in a more extensive portfolio review for certain corporate industry groups. In addition to a review of the portfolio information, this enhanced review (known as the industry portfolio review) incorporates industry outlook, key elements of business strategy, RA, credit profile and emerging/horizon risks. A condensed version of these industry portfolio reviews will also be shared with the CCIB Risk Committee.

Any material in-country developments that may impact sovereign ratings are monitored closely by the Country Risk Team. The Country Risk Early Warning system, a triage-based risk identification system, categorises countries based on a forward-looking view of possible downgrades and the potential incremental risk-weighted assets (RWA) impact.

For CPBB, exposures and collateral monitoring are performed at the counterparty and/or portfolio level across different client segments to ensure transactions and portfolio exposures remain within RA. Portfolio delinquency trends are also monitored. Accounts that are past due (or perceived as high risk but not yet past due) are subject to collections or recovery processes managed by a specialist independent function. In some countries, aspects of collections and recovery activities are outsourced. For discretionary lending portfolios, similar processes to those of CCIB client coverage are followed.

In addition, an independent Credit Risk Review team (part of ERM function), performs judgement-based assessments of the Credit Risk profiles at various portfolio levels. They focus on selected countries and segments through deep dives, comparative analysis, and review and challenge of the basis of credit approvals. The review ensures that the evolving Credit Risk profiles of CCIB and CPBB are well managed within RA and policies, through forward-looking mitigating actions where necessary.



Page 75

Credit rating and measurement

All credit proposals are subject to a robust credit risk assessment. It includes a comprehensive evaluation of the client's credit quality, including willingness, ability, and capacity to repay. The primary lending consideration is based on the client's credit quality and the repayment capacity from operating cashflows for counterparties, and personal income or wealth for individual borrowers. The risk assessment gives due consideration to the client's liquidity and leverage position.

Where applicable, the assessment includes a detailed analysis of the Credit Risk mitigation arrangements to determine the level of reliance on such arrangements as the secondary source of repayment in the event of a significant deterioration in a client's credit quality leading to default. Client income, net worth, and the liquidity of asset by class are considered for overall risk assessment for wealth lending. The availability of Wealth Lending credit limits is subject to the availability of qualified collateral.

Risk measurement plays a central role, along with judgement and experience, in informing risk-taking and portfolio management decisions. We adopt the Advanced Internal Ratings Based (AIRB) approach under the Basel regulatory framework to calculate Credit Risk capital requirements. The Group has also established a global programme to assess capital requirements necessary to be implemented to meet the latest revised Basel III finalisation (referred to as Basel 3.1 or Basel IV) regulations.

A standard alphanumeric Credit Risk grade system is used for CCIB Client Coverage. The numeric grades run from 1 to 14 and some of the grades are further sub-classified. Lower numeric credit grades are indicative of a lower likelihood of default. Credit grades 1 to 12 are assigned to performing customers, while credit grades 13 and 14 are assigned to non-performing or defaulted customers.

CPBB internal ratings-based portfolios use application and behavioural credit scores that are calibrated to generate a probability of default. The Risk Decision Framework uses a credit rating system to define the portfolio/new booking segmentation, shape and decision criteria for the unsecured consumer business segment.

AIRB models cover a substantial majority of our exposures and are used in assessing risks at a customer and portfolio level, setting strategy, and optimising our risk-return decisions. The Model Risk Committee approves material internal ratings-based risk measurement models. Prior to review and approval, all internal ratings based models are validated in detail by an independent model validation team. Reviews are also triggered if the performance of a model deteriorates materially against predetermined thresholds during the ongoing model performance monitoring process, which takes place between the annual validations.

Credit Concentration Risk

Credit Concentration Risk may arise from a single large exposure to a counterparty or a group of connected counterparties, or from multiple exposures across the portfolio that are closely correlated. Large exposure Concentration Risk is managed through concentration limits set for a counterparty or a group of connected counterparties based on control and economic dependence criteria. RA metrics are set at portfolio level and monitored to control concentrations, where appropriate, by industry, products, tenor, collateralisation level, top clients, and exposure to holding companies. Single name credit concentration thresholds are set by client group depending on credit grade, and by customer segment. For concentrations that are material at a Group level, breaches and potential breaches are monitored by the respective governance committees and reported to the GRC and BRC.

Credit impairment

ECL is determined for all financial assets that are classified as amortised cost or fair value through other comprehensive income. ECL is computed as an unbiased, probability-weighted provision determined by evaluating a range of plausible outcomes, the time value of money, and forward-looking information such as critical global or country-specific macroeconomic variables. For more detailed information on macroeconomic data feeding into IFRS 9 ECL calculations, please refer to the Risk profile section.



Page 76

At the time of origination or purchase of a non-credit impaired financial asset (Stage 1), ECL represents cash shortfalls arising from possible default events up to 12 months into the future from the balance sheet date. ECL continues to be determined on this basis until there is a significant increase in the Credit Risk of the asset (Stage 2), in which case ECL is recognised for default events that may occur over the lifetime of the asset. If there is observed objective evidence of credit impairment or default (Stage 3), ECL continues to be measured on a lifetime basis. To provide the Board with oversight and assurance that the quality of assets originated are aligned to the Group's strategy, there is a RA metric to monitor Stage 1 and Stage 2 ECL from assets originated in the past 12 months.

For CCIB, in line with the regulatory guidelines, Stage 3 ECL is considered when an obligor is more than 90 days past due on any amount payable to the Group, or the obligor(s) has symptoms of unlikeliness to pay its credit obligations in full as they fall due. These credit-impaired accounts are managed by SAG.

In CPBB, loans to individuals and small businesses are considered credit-impaired as soon as any payment of interest or principal is 90 days overdue or they meet other objective evidence of impairment, such as bankruptcy, debt restructuring, fraud, or death. Financial assets are written off, in the amount that is determined to be irrecoverable, when they meet conditions set such that empirical evidence suggests the client is unlikely to meet their contractual obligations, or a loss of principal is reasonably expected.

Estimating the amount and timing of future recoveries involves significant judgement and considers the assessment of matters such as future economic conditions and the value of collateral, for which there may not be a readily accessible market. The total amount of the Group's impairment provision is inherently uncertain, being sensitive to changes in economic and credit conditions across the regions in which the Group operates. For further details on sensitivity analysis of ECL under IFRS 9, please refer to the Risk profile section.

 

Traded Risk

The Group defines Traded Risk as the potential for loss resulting from activities undertaken by the Group in financial markets.

Risk Appetite Statement

The Group should control its financial markets and activities to ensure that market and counterparty credit risk losses do not cause material damage to the Group's franchise.

Roles and responsibilities

The Traded RTF, which sets the roles and responsibilities in respect of Traded Risk for the Group, is owned by the Global Head, Traded Risk Management (TRM). The business, acting as first line of defence, is responsible for the effective management of risks within the scope of its direct organisational responsibilities set by the Board.

TRM is the second line control function that performs independent challenge, monitoring and oversight of the Traded Risk management practices of the first line of defence, predominantly Financial Markets and Treasury Markets.

Mitigation

The Traded RTF requires that Traded Risk limits be defined at a level appropriate to ensure that the Group remains within RA. All businesses incurring Traded Risk must comply with the Traded RTF. The Traded Risk Policy sets the principles that must be followed for the end-to-end traded risk management process, including limit setting, risk capture and measurement, limit monitoring and escalation, risk mitigation and stress testing. Policies and standards ensure that these Traded Risk limits are implemented. Policies are reviewed and approved by the Global Head, TRM periodically to ensure their ongoing effectiveness.



Page 77

Governance committee oversight

At Board level, the BRC oversees the effective management of Traded Risk. At the executive level, the GRC delegates responsibilities to the CCIB Risk Committee to oversee the Traded Risk profile of the Group. For subsidiaries, the authority for setting Traded Risk limits is delegated from the local board to the local risk committee, Country CRO and Traded Risk managers. Meetings are held regularly, and the committees monitor all material Traded Risk exposures, as well as key internal developments and external trends, and ensure that appropriate action is taken.

Decision-making authorities and delegation

The Traded RTF is the formal mechanism which delegates Traded Risk authorities cascading from the GCRO, as the Senior Manager of the Traded Risk Type, to the Global Head, TRM who further delegates authorities to named individuals.

Traded Risk authorities are reviewed at least annually to ensure that they remain appropriate and to assess the quality of decisions taken by the authorised person. Key risk-taking decisions are made only by certain individuals with the skills, judgement, and perspective to ensure that the Group's control standards and risk-return objectives are met.

Market Risk

The Group uses a VaR model to measure the risk of losses arising from future potential adverse movements in market rates, prices, and volatilities. VaR is a quantitative measure of Market Risk that applies recent historical market conditions to estimate the potential future loss in market value that will not be exceeded in a set time period at a set statistical confidence level. VaR provides a consistent measure that can be applied across trading businesses and products over time and can be set against actual daily trading profit and loss outcomes.

For day-to-day risk management, VaR is calculated as at the close of business, generally at UK time for expected market movements over one business day and to a confidence level of 97.5 per cent. Intra-day risk levels may vary from those reported at the end of the day.

The Group applies two VaR methodologies:

Historical simulation: this involves the revaluation of all existing positions to reflect the effect of historically observed changes in Market Risk factors on the valuation of the current portfolio. This approach is applied for general Market Risk factors and the majority of specific (credit spread) risk VaRs.

Monte Carlo simulation: this methodology is similar to historical simulation but with considerably more input risk factor observations. These are generated by random sampling techniques, but the results retain the essential variability and correlations of historically observed risk factor changes. This approach is applied for some of the specific (credit spread) risk VaRs in relation to idiosyncratic exposures in credit markets.

A one-year historical observation period is applied in both methods.

As an input to regulatory capital, trading book VaR is calculated for expected movements over 10 business days and to a confidence level of 99 per cent. Some types of Market Risk are not captured in the regulatory VaR measure, and these Risks not in VaR are subject to capital add-ons.

An analysis of VaR results in 2023 is available in the Risk profile section.

Counterparty Credit Risk

The Group uses a Potential Future Exposure (PFE) model to measure the credit exposure arising from the positive mark-to-market of traded products and future potential movements in market rates, prices, and volatilities. PFE is a quantitative measure of Counterparty Credit Risk that applies recent historical market conditions to estimate the potential future credit exposure that will not be exceeded in a set time period at a confidence level of 97.5 per cent. PFE is calculated for expected market movements over different time horizons based on the tenor of the transactions.

The Group applies two PFE methodologies: simulation based, which is predominantly used, and an add-on based PFE methodology.



Page 78

Underwriting

The underwriting of securities and loans is in scope of the RA set by the Group for Traded Risk. Additional limits approved by the GCRO are set on the sectoral concentration, and the maximum holding period. The Underwriting Committee, under the authority of the GCRO, approves individual proposals to underwrite new security issues and loans for our clients.

Monitoring

TRM monitors the overall portfolio risk and ensures that it is within specified limits and therefore RA. Limits are typically reviewed twice a year. Most of the Traded Risk exposures are monitored daily against approved limits. Traded Risk limits apply at all times unless separate intra-day limits have been set. Limit excess approval decisions are based on an assessment of the circumstances driving the excess and of the proposed remediation plan. Limits and excesses can only be approved by a Traded Risk manager with the appropriate delegated authority.

 

Treasury Risk

The Group defines Treasury Risk as the potential for insufficient capital, liquidity, or funding to support our operations, the risk of reductions in earnings or value from movements in interest rates impacting banking book items and the potential for losses from a shortfall in the Group's pension plans.

Risk Appetite Statement

The Group should maintain sufficient capital, liquidity and funding to support its operations, and an interest rate profile ensuring that the reductions in earnings or value from movements in interest rates impacting banking book items does not cause material damage to the Group's franchise. In addition, the Group should ensure its pension plans are adequately funded.

Roles and responsibilities

The Global Head, ERM is responsible for the RTF for Treasury Risk under the ERMF.

The Group Treasurer is supported by teams in Treasury and Finance to implement the Treasury RTF as the first line of defence and is responsible for managing Treasury Risk.

At Regional and Country level, Chief Executive Officers (CEOs) supported by Regional and Country level Finance and Treasury teams are responsible for managing Treasury Risk as the first line of defence. Regional Treasury CROs and Country CROs for Treasury Risk (except Pension Risk) and Head of Pensions (for Pension Risk) are responsible for overseeing and challenging the first line of defence.

Mitigation

The Group develops policies to address material Treasury Risks and aims to maintain its risk profile within RA. In order to do this, metrics are set against Capital Risk, Liquidity and Funding Risk and IRRBB. Where appropriate, RA metrics are cascaded down to regions and countries in the form of Limits and Management Action Triggers.

Capital Risk

In order to manage Capital Risk, strategic business, and capital plans (Corporate Plan) are drawn up covering a five-year horizon which are approved by the Board annually. The plan ensures that adequate levels of capital, including loss absorbing capacity, and an efficient mix of the different components of capital are maintained to support our strategy and business plans.

Treasury is responsible for the ongoing assessment of the demand for capital and the updating of the Group's capital plan.

RA metrics including capital, leverage, Minimum Requirement for own funds and Eligible Liability (MREL) and double leverage are assessed within the Corporate Plan to ensure that the strategy can be achieved within risk tolerances.



Page 79

Structural Foreign Exchange (FX) Risk

The Group's structural FX position results from the Group's non-US dollar investment in the share capital and reserves of subsidiaries and branches. The FX translation gains, or losses, are recorded in the Group's translation reserves with a direct impact on the Group's Common Equity Tier 1 ratio.

The Group contracts hedges to manage its structural FX position in accordance with the RA, and as a result the Group has taken net investment hedges to partially cover its exposure to certain non-US dollar currencies to mitigate the FX impact of such positions on its capital ratios.

Liquidity and Funding Risk

At Group, regional and country level we implement various business-as-usual and stress risk metrics to monitor and manage liquidity and funding risk. This ensures that the Group maintains an adequate and well-diversified liquidity buffer, as well as a stable funding base, and that it meets its liquidity and funding regulatory requirements. The approach to managing risks and the RA is assessed annually through the Internal Liquidity Adequacy Assessment Process. A funding plan is also developed for efficient liquidity projections to ensure that the Group is adequately funded in the required currencies, to meet its obligations and client funding needs. The funding plan is part of the overall Corporate Plan process aligning to the capital requirements.

Interest Rate Risk in the Banking Book

This risk arises from differences in the repricing profile, interest rate basis, and optionality of banking book assets liabilities and off-balance sheet items. IRRBB represents an economic and commercial risk to the Group and its capital adequacy. The Group monitors IRRBB against the RA.

Pension Risk

Pension Risk is the potential for loss due to having to meet an actuarially assessed shortfall in the Group's pension plans. Pension obligation risk to a firm arises from its contractual or other liabilities to or with respect to an occupational pension plan or other long-term benefit obligation. For a funded plan it represents the risk that additional contributions will need to be made because of a future shortfall in the funding of the plan. Or, for unfunded obligations, it represents the risk that the cost of meeting future benefit payments is greater than currently anticipated. The Pension Risk position against RA metric is reported to the GRC. This metric is calculated as the total capital requirement (including both Pillar 1 and Pillar 2A capital) in respect of Pension Risk, expressed as a number of basis points of RWA.

Recovery and Resolution Planning

In line with PRA requirements, the Group maintains a Recovery Plan which is a live document to be used by management in the event of stress in order to restore the Group to a stable and sustainable position. The Recovery Plan includes a set of recovery indicators, an escalation framework, and a set of management actions capable of being implemented during a stress. A Recovery Plan is also maintained within each major entity, and all recovery plans are subject to periodic fire-drill testing.

As the UK resolution authority, the BoE is required to set a preferred resolution strategy for the Group. The BoE's preferred resolution strategy is whole Group single point of entry bail-in at the ultimate holding company level (Standard Chartered PLC) and would be led by the BoE. In support of this strategy, the Group has been developing a set of capabilities, arrangements, and resources to achieve the required outcomes. Following the BoE's first resolvability assessment and public disclosure for major UK firms in 2022, the second Resolvability Assessment Framework (RAF) cycle is under way. The Group submitted its Resolvability Assessment Report to the BoE and PRA on 6 October 2023 and is due to publish its resolvability public disclosure in June 2024.

Governance committee oversight

At the Board level, the BRC oversees the effective management of Treasury Risk. At the executive level, the GALCO ensures the effective management of risk throughout the Group in support of the Group's strategy, guides the Group's strategy on balance sheet optimisation and ensures that the Group operates within the RA and other internal and external requirements relating to Treasury Risk (except Pension Risk). The GRC and Regional Risk Committees provide oversight for Pension Risk.



Page 80

Regional and country oversight resides with regional and country Asset and Liability Committees. Regions and countries must ensure that they remain in compliance with Group Treasury policies and practices, as well as local regulatory requirements.

Decision-making authorities and delegation

The GCFO has responsibility for capital, funding, and liquidity under the SMR. The GCRO has delegated the RFO responsibilities associated with Treasury Risk to the Global Head, ERM. The Global Head, ERM delegates second line of defence oversight and challenge responsibilities to the Treasury CRO and Country CROs for Capital Risk, Liquidity and Funding Risk and IRRBB, and to Head of Pensions for Pension Risk.

Monitoring

On a day-to-day basis, Treasury Risk is managed by Treasury, Finance and Country CEOs. The Group regularly reports and monitors Treasury Risk inherent in its business activities and those that arise from internal and external events.

Internal risk management reports covering the balance sheet and the capital and liquidity position are presented to the relevant country Asset and Liability Committee. The reports contain key information on balance sheet trends, exposures against RA and supporting risk measures which enable members to make informed decisions around the overall management of the balance sheet.

In addition, an independent Treasury CRO as part of ERM reviews the prudency and effectiveness of Treasury Risk management.

Pension Risk is actively managed by the Head of Pensions and monitored by the Head of Country Risk, Scenario Analysis, Insurable and Pension Risk. The Head of Pensions ensures that accurate, complete, and timely updates on Pension Risk are shared with the Head of Country Risk, Scenario Analysis and Pension Risk, the Treasury CRO and the Global Head, ERM on a periodic basis.

 

Operational and Technology Risk

The Group defines Operational and Technology risk as the potential for loss resulting from inadequate or failed internal processes, technology events, human error, or from the impact of external events (including legal risks).

Risk Appetite Statement

The Group aims to control operational and technology risks to ensure that operational losses (financial or reputational), including any related to conduct of business matters, do not cause material damage to the Group's franchise.

Changes to Third Party Risk

With effect from January 2024, the Group has removed the IRT classification and formally included Third Party Risk as a sub risk under Operational and Technology Risk. Third Party Risk is defined as the potential for loss or adverse impact due to the failure to manage the onboarding, lifecycle and exit strategy of a third party. The Third Party Risk Management Policy and Standard, in conjunction with the respective PRT policies and standards, holistically set out the Group's minimum controls requirements for the identification, mitigation and management of risks arising from the use of Third Parties.

Roles and responsibilities

The Operational and Technology RTF sets the roles and responsibilities in respect of Operational and Technology risk for the Group. The Operational and Technology RTF defines the Group's Operational and Technology risk sub-types and sets standards for the identification, control, monitoring and treatment of risks. These standards are applicable across all PRTs and risk sub-types in the Operational and Technology RTF. The list of risk sub-types includes Execution Capability, Governance, Reporting and Obligations, Legal Enforceability, and Operational Resilience (including client service, change management, people management, safety and security, and technology risk).



Page 81

The Operational and Technology RTF reinforces clear accountability for managing risk throughout the Group and delegates second line of defence responsibilities to identified SMEs. For each risk sub-type, the subject matter expert sets policies and standards for the organisation to comply with, and provides guidance, oversight, and challenge over the activities of the Group. They ensure that key risk decisions are only taken by individuals with the requisite skills, judgement, and perspective to ensure that the Group's risk-return objectives are met.

Mitigation

The Operational and Technology RTF sets out the Group's overall approach to the management of Operational and Technology risk in line with the Group's Operational and Technology RA. This is supported by the Risk and Control Self-Assessment (RCSA) which defines roles and responsibilities for the identification, control, and monitoring of risks (applicable to all PRTs, risk sub-types and IRTs).

The RCSA is used to determine the design strength and reliability of each process, and requires:

the recording of processes run by client segments, products, and functions into a process universe;

the identification of potential failures in these processes and the related risks of such failures;

an assessment of the impact of the identified risks based on a consistent scale;

the design and monitoring of controls to mitigate prioritised risks; and

assessments of residual risk and timely actions for elevated risks.

Risks that exceed the Group's Operational and Technology RA require treatment plans to address underlying causes.

Governance committee oversight

At Board level, the BRC oversees the effective management of Operational and Technology risk. At the executive level, the GRC is responsible for the governance and oversight of Operational and Technology risk for the Group. The GRC, supported by the GNFRC, monitors the Group's Operational and Technology RA and relies on other key committees for the management of Operational and Technology risk.

Regional business segments and functional committees also provide governance oversight of their respective processes and related Operational and Technology risk. In addition, Country Non-Financial Risk Committees (CNFRCs) oversee the management of Operational and Technology Risk at the country (or entity) level. In smaller countries, the responsibilities of the CNFRC may be exercised directly by the Country Risk Committee (for branches) or Executive Risk Committee (for subsidiaries).

Decision-making authorities and delegation

The GCRO has delegated the RFO responsibilities associated with the Operational and Technology RTF to the Global Head of Risk, Functions and Operational Risk (GHRFOR).

The Operational and Technology RTF is the formal mechanism through which the delegation of Operational and Technology Risk authorities is made. The GHRFOR places reliance on the respective SMEs for second line of defence oversight of the relevant Operational and Technology risk sub-types through the Operational and Technology RTF.

Monitoring

To deliver services to clients and to participate in the financial services sector, the Group runs processes which are exposed to Operational and Technology risks. The Group prioritises and manages risks which are significant to clients and to the financial services sectors. Control indicators are regularly monitored to determine the Group's exposure to residual risk.

The residual risk assessments and reporting of events form the Group's Operational and Technology Risk profile. The completeness of the Operational and Technology Risk profile ensures appropriate prioritisation and timeliness of risk decisions, including risk acceptances with treatment plans for risks that exceed acceptable thresholds.


Page 82

The Board Risk Committee is informed on adherence to Operational and Technology RA through metrics reported for selected risks. These metrics are monitored, and escalation thresholds are devised based on the materiality and significance of the risk. These Operational and Technology RA metrics are consolidated on a regular basis and reported at relevant Group committees. This provides senior management with the relevant information to inform their risk decisions.

Financial Crime Risk

The Group defines Financial Crime Risk as the potential for legal or regulatory penalties, material financial loss or reputational damage resulting from the failure to comply with applicable laws and regulations relating to international sanctions, anti-money laundering and anti-bribery and corruption, and fraud.

Risk Appetite Statement

The Group has no appetite for breaches in laws and regulations related to financial crime, recognising that whilst incidents are unwanted, they cannot be entirely avoided.

Roles and responsibilities

The Group Head, CFCC has overall responsibility for Financial Crime Risk and is responsible for the establishment and maintenance of effective systems and controls to meet legal and regulatory obligations in respect of Financial Crime Risk. The Group Head, CFCC is the Group's Compliance and Money-Laundering Reporting Officer and performs the Financial Conduct Authority (FCA) controlled function and senior management function in accordance with the requirements set out by the FCA, including those set out in their handbook on systems and controls. As the first line of defence, the business process owners have responsibility for the application of policy controls and the identification and measurement of risks relating to financial crime. The business must communicate risks and any policy non-compliance to the second line of defence for review and approval following the model for delegation of authority.

Mitigation

There are four Group policies in support of the Financial Crime RTF:

Group Anti-Bribery and Corruption Policy

Group Anti-Money Laundering and Counter Terrorist Financing Policy

Group Sanctions Policy

Group Fraud Risk Management Policy

The Group operates risk-based assessments and controls in support of its Financial Crime Risk programme, including (but not limited to):

Group Risk Assessment: the Group monitors enterprise-wide Financial Crime Risks through the CFCC Risk Assessment process consisting of Financial Crime Risk and Compliance Risk assessments. The Financial Crime Risk assessment is a Group-wide risk assessment undertaken annually to assess the inherent Financial Crime Risk exposures and the associated processes and controls by which these exposures are mitigated.

Financial Crime Surveillance: risk-based systems and processes to prevent and detect financial crime.

The strength of controls is tested and assessed through the Group's Operational and Technology RTF, in addition to oversight by CFCC Assurance.

Governance committee oversight

Financial Crime Risk within the Group is governed by the GFCRC and the GNFRC for Fraud Risk.

The GFCRC is responsible for ensuring effective oversight for operational risk relating to Financial Crime Risk. Board Level oversight of Financial Crime risk is performed by the Audit Committee and the BRC.

Page 83

Decision-making authorities and delegation

The Financial Crime RTF is the formal mechanism through which the delegation of Financial Crime Risk authorities is made. The Group Head, CFCC is the RFO for Financial Crime Risk under the Group's ERMF. Certain aspects of Financial Crime Compliance, second line of defence oversight and challenge, are delegated within the CFCC function. Approval frameworks are in place to allow for risk-based decisions on client onboarding, potential breaches of sanctions regulation or policy, situations of potential money laundering (and terrorist financing), bribery and corruption or internal and external fraud.

Monitoring

The Group monitors Financial Crime Risk compliance against a set of RA metrics. These metrics are reviewed periodically and reported regularly to the GFCRC, GNFRC, BRC, GRC, and relevant Board committees.



Page 84

Compliance Risk

The Group defines Compliance Risk as the potential for penalties or loss to the Group or for an adverse impact to our clients, stakeholders or to the integrity of the markets we operate in through a failure on our part to comply with laws, or regulations.

Risk Appetite Statement

The Group has no appetite for breaches in laws and regulations related to regulatory non-compliance; recognising that whilst incidents are unwanted, they cannot be entirely avoided.

Roles and responsibilities

The Group Head, CFCC as RFO for Compliance Risk provides support to senior management on regulatory and compliance matters by:

providing interpretation and advice on CFCC regulatory requirements and their impact on the Group; and

setting enterprise-wide standards for management of compliance risks through the establishment and maintenance of the Compliance RTF.

The Group Head, CFCC also performs the FCA controlled function and senior management function of Compliance Risk oversight in accordance with the requirements set out by the FCA.

All activities that the Group engages in must be designed to comply with the applicable laws and regulations in the countries in which we operate. The CFCC function provides second line of defence oversight and challenge of the first line of defence risk management activities that relate to Compliance Risk. Where Compliance Risk arises, or could arise, from failure to manage another PRT or sub-type, the Compliance RTF outlines that the responsibility rests with the respective RFO or control function to ensure that effective oversight and challenge of the first line of defence can be provided by the appropriate second line of defence function.

Each of the assigned second line of defence functions have responsibilities, including monitoring relevant regulatory developments from Non-Financial Services regulators at both Group and country levels, policy development, implementation, and validation as well as oversight and challenge of first line of defence processes and controls. In addition, the remit of CFCC has been further clarified in 2023 in relation to Compliance risk and the boundary of responsibilities with other PRTs.

Mitigation

The CFCC function is responsible for the establishment and maintenance of policies, standards and controls to ensure continued legal and regulatory compliance, and the mitigation of Compliance Risk. In this, the requirements of the Operational and Technology RTF are followed to ensure a consistent approach to the management of processes and controls.

The deployment of technological solutions to improve efficiencies and simplify processes has continued in 2023. These include launch of a new Regulatory Change Management System for Group regulatory obligations management, and further enhancement of the Ask Compliance platform.

Governance committee oversight

Both Compliance Risk and the risk of non-compliance with laws and regulations resulting from failed processes and controls are reported at the respective country, business, product, function, Risk and CFCC Non-Financial Risk Committees. Relevant matters, as required, are further escalated to the GNFRC and GRC. At Board level, oversight of Compliance Risk is primarily provided by the Audit Committee, and by the BRC for relevant issues.

Whilst not a formal governance committee, the CFCC Oversight Group provides oversight of CFCC risks including the effective implementation of the Compliance RTF. The Regulatory Change Oversight Forum provides visibility and oversight of material and/or complex large-scale regulatory change emanating from Financial Services regulators impacting Non-Financial Risks. The CFCC Policy Council provides oversight, challenge and direction to Compliance and FCC Policy Owners on material changes and positions taken in CFCC-owned policies, including issues relating to regulatory interpretation and Group's CFCC RA.



Page 85

Decision-making authorities and delegation

The Compliance RTF is the formal mechanism through which the delegation of Compliance Risk authorities is made. The Group Head, CFCC has the authority to delegate second line of defence responsibilities within the CFCC function to relevant and suitably qualified individuals.

Monitoring

The monitoring of controls designed to mitigate the risk of regulatory non-compliance in processes is governed in line with the Operational and Technology RTF. The Group has a monitoring and reporting process in place for Compliance Risk, which includes escalation and reporting to Risk and CFCC Non-Financial Risk Committee, GNFRC, GRC, BRC, and relevant Board committees.

Information and Cyber Security (ICS) Risk

The Group defines ICS Risk as the risk to the Group's assets, operations, and individuals due to the potential for unauthorised access, use, disclosure, disruption, modification, or destruction of information assets
and/or information systems.

Risk Appetite Statement

The Group aims to mitigate and control ICS risks to ensure that incidents do not cause the Bank material harm, business disruption, financial loss or reputational damage - recognising that whilst incidents are unwanted, they cannot be entirely avoided.

Roles and responsibilities

The Group's ICS RTF defines the roles and responsibilities of the first and second lines of defence in managing and governing ICS Risk across the Group. It emphasises business ownership and individual accountability.

The Group Chief Transformation, Technology & Operations Officer (CTTO) has the first line of defence responsibility for ICS Risk and is accountable for the Group's ICS strategy. The Group Chief Information Security Officer (CISO) leads the development and execution of the ICS strategy. The first line of defence also manages all key ICS Risks, breaches and risk treatment plans. ICS Risk profile, RA breaches and remediation status are reported at Board and Executive committees, alongside business, function and country governance committees.

The Group Chief Information Security Risk Officer (CISRO) function within Group Risk is the second line of defence and sets the framework, policy, standards, and methodology for assessing, scoring, and prioritising ICS Risks across the Group. The ICS Policy and standards are aligned to industry best practice models including the National Institute of Standards and Technology Cyber Security Framework and ISO 27001.   This function has the responsibility for governance, oversight, and independent challenge of first line of defence's pursuit of the ICS strategy. Group ICS Risk Framework Strategy remains the responsibility of the ICS RFO (RFO), delegated from the GCRO to the Group CISRO.

Mitigation

ICS Risk is managed through the ICS RTF, comprising a risk assessment methodology and supporting policy, standards, and methodologies. These are aligned to industry recommended practice. We undertake an annual ICS Effectiveness Review to evaluate ICS Risk management practices in alignment with the ERMF.

Governance committee oversight

The BRC oversees the effective management of ICS Risk. The GRC has delegated authority to the GNFRC to ensure effective implementation of the ICS RTF. The GRC and GNFRC are responsible for oversight of ICS Risk profile and RA breaches. Sub-committees of the GNFRC have oversight of ICS Risk management arising from the businesses, countries and functions.

Decision-making authorities and delegation

The ICS RTF defines how the Group manages ICS Risk. The Group CISRO delegates authority to designated individuals through the ICS RTF, including at a business, function, region and country level.

The Group CISO is responsible for implementing ICS Risk Management within the Group, and to cascade ICS risk management into the businesses, functions and countries to comply with the ICS RTF, policy, and standards.

Page 86

Monitoring

Group CISO performs a threat-led risk assessment to identify key threats, in-scope applications and key controls required to ensure the Group remains within RA.

The ICS Risk profiles of all businesses, functions and countries are consolidated to present a holistic Group-level ICS Risk profile for ongoing monitoring. Mandatory ICS learning, phishing exercises and role-specific training support colleagues to monitor and manage this risk.

During these reviews, the status of each risk is assessed against the Group's controls to identify any changes to impact and likelihood, which affects the overall risk rating.

Group CISO and Group CISRO monitor the ICS Risk profile and ensure that breaches of RA are escalated to the appropriate governance committee or authority levels for remediation and tracking. A dedicated Group CISRO team supports this work by executing offensive security testing exercises, including vulnerability assessments and penetration tests, which show a wider picture of the Group's risk profile, leading to better visibility on potential 'in flight' risks. The Group also tracks remediation of security matters identified by external reviews such as the  BoE CBEST Threat Intelligence-Led Assessment and the Hong Kong Monetary Authority's (HKMA) Intelligence-led Cyber Attack Simulation Testing (iCAST).

 

Reputational and Sustainability Risk

The Group defines Reputational and Sustainability Risk as the potential for damage to the franchise (such as loss of trust, earnings, or market capitalisation), because of stakeholders taking a negative view of the Group through actual or perceived actions or inactions, including a failure to uphold responsible business conduct as we strive to do no significant environmental and social harm through our client, third party relationships or our own operations.

Risk Appetite Statement

The Group aims to protect the franchise from material damage to its reputation by ensuring that any business activity is satisfactorily assessed and managed with the appropriate level of management and governance oversight. This includes a potential failure to uphold responsible business conduct in striving to do no significant environmental and social harm.

Roles and responsibilities

The Global Head, ERM is responsible as RFO for Reputational and Sustainability Risk under the Group's ERMF.

Our Reputational and Sustainability RTF allocates responsibilities in a manner consistent with the three lines of defence model.

In the first line of defence, the Chief Sustainability Officer (CSO) manages the overall Group Sustainability strategy and engagements. A dedicated Sustainable Finance solutions team is responsible for sustainable finance products and frameworks to help identify green and sustainable finance, and transition finance opportunities to aid our clients on their sustainability journey. The CSO team works with businesses to launch various sustainable finance products. Furthermore, the Environmental and Social Risk Management (ESRM) team provides dedicated advisory and challenge to businesses on the management of environmental and social risks and impacts arising from the Group's client relationships and transactions.

In the second line of defence, the responsibility for Reputational and Sustainability Risk management is delegated to the Group Environmental, Social, and Corporate Governance (ESG) and Reputational Risk team, as well as CROs at region, country and client-business levels. They constitute the second line responsible to oversee and challenge the first line, which resides with the CEOs, business heads, product heads and function heads. The Group ESG and Reputational Risk team is responsible for establishing RA, framework and policies for managing Reputational and Sustainability risk, in line with emerging regulatory expectations across our markets.

Page 87

Mitigation

In line with the principles of Responsible Business Conduct and Do No Significant Harm, the Group deems Reputational and Sustainability Risk to be driven by:

negative shifts in stakeholder perceptions, including shifts as a result of greenwashing claims, due to decisions related to clients, products, transactions, third parties and strategic coverage;

potential material harm or degradation to the natural environment (environmental) through actions/inactions of the Group; and

potential material harm to individuals or communities (social) risks through actions/inactions of the Group.

The Group's Reputational Risk policy sets out the principal sources of Reputational Risk driven by negative shifts in stakeholder perceptions as well as responsibilities, control and oversight standards for identifying, assessing, escalating and effectively managing Reputational Risk. The assessment of risks associated with how individual client, transaction, product and strategic coverage decisions may affect perceptions of the organisation and its activities is based on explicit principles including, but not limited to, human rights and climate change. The assessment of stakeholder perception risk considers a variety of factors. Whenever potential for stakeholder concerns is identified, issues are subject to review and decision by both first and second lines of defence.

The Group's Sustainability Risk policy sets out the requirements and responsibilities for managing environmental and social risks for the Group's clients, third parties and in our own operations. This includes management of greenwashing risks through the ongoing monitoring of Sustainable Finance products and transactions and clients throughout their lifecycle, from labelling to disclosures in line with emerging local and international regulatory obligations.

Clients are expected to adhere to the minimum regulatory and compliance requirements, including criteria from the Group's Position Statements to sensitive sectors where environmental and social risks are heightened. The Group also defines the approach to certain specialist sectors where there are conflicting stakeholder views.

Third parties such as suppliers must comply with the Group's Supplier Charter, which sets out the Group's expectations on ethics, anti-bribery and corruption, human rights, environmental, health and safety standards, labour and protection of the environment. The Group is committed to respecting universal human rights, and we assess our clients and suppliers against various international principles, as well as through our social safeguards.

Within our operations, the Group seeks to minimise its impact on the environment and have targets to reduce energy, water and waste. We are committed to becoming Net Zero in our own operations by 2025.

We rely on our frameworks to help the labelling of Sustainable Finance Use of Proceeds products and transactions as well as the classification of pureplay clients.

Reputational and Sustainability Risk policies and standards are applicable to all Group entities. However, where local regulators impose additional requirements, these are complied with in addition to existing Group requirements.

Governance committee oversight

At Board level, the Culture and Sustainability Committee provides oversight for our Sustainability strategy while the BRC oversees Reputational and Sustainability Risk as part of the ERMF. The GRC provides executive level committee oversight and delegates the authority to ensure effective management of Reputational and Sustainability Risk to the GRRRC.

The GRRRC's remit is to:

Challenge, constrain and, if required, stop business activities where Reputational and Sustainability risks are not aligned with the Group's RA;

Make decisions on Reputational and Sustainability Risk matters assessed as high or very high based on the Group's Reputational and Sustainability Risk Materiality Assessment Matrix, and matters escalated from the regions or client businesses;

Provide oversight of material Reputational and Sustainability Risk and/or thematic issues arising from the potential failure of other risk types;

Page 88

 

Identify TERs, as part of a dynamic risk scanning process;

Monitor existing or new regulatory priorities.

The Sustainable Finance Governance Committee, appointed by the GRRRC, provides leadership, governance, and oversight for delivering the Group's sustainable finance offering. This includes:

Reviewing and supporting the Group's frameworks for Green and Sustainable Products, and Transition Finance for approval of GRRRC. These frameworks set out the guidelines for approval of products and transactions which carry the sustainable finance and/or transition finance label;

Decision-making authority on the eligibility of a sustainable asset for any RWA relief;

Approving sustainable finance and transition finance labels for products in addition to regular product management and governance;

Reviewing the reputational risks arising from greenwashing claims related to Sustainable Finance products and services.

The GNFRC has oversight of the control environment and effective management of Reputational Risk incurred when there are negative shifts in stakeholder perceptions of the Group due to failure of other PRTs. The regional and client-business risk committees provide oversight on the Reputational and Sustainability Risk profile within their remit. The CNFRC provides oversight of the Reputational and Sustainability Risk profile at a country level.

Decision-making authorities and delegation

The Global Head, ERM delegates risk acceptance authorities for stakeholder perception risks to designated individuals in the first line and second line or to committees such as the GRRRC via risk authority matrices.

These risk authority matrices are tiered at country, regional, business segment or Group levels and are established for risks incurred in strategic coverage, clients, products, or transactions. For environmental and social risks, the ESRM team reviews and supports the risk assessments for clients and transactions and escalates to the Group ESG and Reputational Risk team as required.

Monitoring

Exposure to stakeholder perception risks arising from transactions, clients, products and strategic coverage is monitored through established triggers to prompt the right levels of appropriate risk-based consideration and assessment by the first line and escalations to the second line where necessary. Risk acceptance decisions and thematic trends are also reviewed on a periodic basis.

Exposure to Sustainability Risk is monitored through triggers embedded within the first line of defence processes. The Environmental and Social Risks are considered for clients and transactions via the environmental and social risk assessments and for vendors in our supply chain through the Modern Slavery questionnaires.

Furthermore, monitoring and reporting on the RA metrics ensures that there is appropriate oversight by the MT and Board over performance and breaches of thresholds across key metrics.

 

Model Risk

The Group defines Model Risk as potential loss that may occur because of decisions or the risk of mis-estimation that could be principally based on the output of models due to errors in the development, implementation, or use of such models.

Risk Appetite Statement

The Group has no appetite for material adverse implications arising from misuse of models or errors in the development or implementation of models; whilst accepting some model uncertainty.

Page 89

Roles and responsibilities

The Global Head, ERM is the RFO for Model Risk under the Group's ERMF. Responsibility for the oversight and implementation of the Model RTF is delegated to the Global Head, Model Risk Management.

The Model RTF sets out clear accountability and roles for Model Risk management through the three lines of defence model. First line of defence ownership of Model Risk resides with Model Sponsors, who are business or function heads and assign a Model Owner and provide oversight of Model Owner activities. Model Owners are accountable for the model development process, represent model users, are responsible for the overall model design process, coordinate the submission of models for validation and approval, and ensure appropriate implementation and use. Model Developers are responsible for the development of models and are responsible for documenting and testing the model in accordance with Policy requirements, and for engaging with Model Users.

Second line of defence oversight is provided by Model Risk Management, which comprises Group Model Validation (GMV) to independently review and grade models, and the Model Risk Policy and Governance team, which provides oversight of model risk activities and reports to senior management via respective committees.

The Group adopts an industry standard model definition as specified in the Group Model Risk Policy, together with a scope of applicability represented by defined model family types as detailed within the Model Risk Framework. Model Owners are accountable for ensuring that all models under their purview have been independently validated by GMV. Models are validated before use and then on an ongoing basis, with schedule determined by the perceived level of model risk associated with the model, or more frequently if there are specific regulatory requirements.

The Model Risk Framework is cascaded to in-scope countries by way of local addendum or local framework documentation, along with specific responsibilities of the Country Model RFO. In-scope countries are selected with reference to regulatory capital requirements with credit risk (AIRB), counterparty credit risk Internal Model Method (IMM), or market risk Internal Model Approach (IMA) permissions for use of models for regulatory capital calculations; and countries where regulators have stipulated specific model risk requirements. Additional criteria, including financial materiality, regulatory importance, presence of important business services or critical economic functions are also considered.

The main responsibilities of Country Model RFO are to ensure model usage is correctly identified, a suitable local governance process is established, and fundamental model risk training is provided for respective country stakeholders.

Based on respective levels of regulatory expectations regarding Model Risk, a tiering approach is adopted to provide appropriate risk-based levels of depth and rigour of the associated requirements.

Mitigation

The Model Risk policy and standards define requirements for model development and validation activities, including regular model performance monitoring. Any model issues or deficiencies identified through the validation process are mitigated through model monitoring, model overlays and/or a model redevelopment plan, which undergoes robust review, challenge, and approval. Operational controls govern all Model Risk-related processes, with regular risk assessments performed to assess appropriateness and effectiveness of those controls, in line with the Operational and Technology RTF, with remediation plans implemented where necessary.

Governance committee oversight

At Board level, the BRC exercises oversight of Model Risk within the Group. At the executive level, the GRC has appointed the Model Risk Committee to ensure effective measurement and management of Model Risk. Sub-committees such as the Credit Model Assessment Committee, Traded Risk Model Assessment Committee and Financial Crime Compliance Model Assessment Committee oversee their respective in-scope models and escalate material Model Risks to the Model Risk Committee. In parallel, business and function-level risk committees provide governance oversight of the models used in their respective processes.



 

Page 90

Decision-making authorities and delegation

The Model RTF is the formal mechanism through which the delegation of Model Risk authorities is made.

The Global Head, ERM delegates authorities to designated individuals or Policy Owners through the Model RTF. The second line of defence ownership for Model Risk at country level is delegated to Country CROs at the applicable branches and subsidiaries.

The Model Risk Committee is responsible for approving models for use. Model approval authority is also delegated to the Credit Model Assessment Committee, Traded Risk Model Assessment Committee, Financial Crime Compliance Model Assessment Committee, and individual designated model approvers for less material models.

Monitoring

The Group monitors Model Risk via a set of RA metrics. Adherence to Model RA and any threshold breaches are reported to the BRC, GRC and Model Risk Committee. These metrics and thresholds are reviewed twice per year to ensure that threshold calibration remains appropriate, and the themes adequately cover the current risks.

Models undergo regular monitoring based on their level of perceived Model Risk, with monitoring results and breaches presented to Model Risk Management and delegated model approvers.

Model Risk Management produces Model Risk reports covering the model landscape, which include performance metrics, identified model issues and remediation plans. These are presented for discussion at the Model Risk governance committees on a regular basis.

 

Climate Risk (Oversight has moved to Reputational and Sustainability Risk with effect from January 2024)

With effect from January 2024, the Group has removed the IRT classification. Climate Risk is defined as the potential for financial loss and non-financial detriments arising from climate change and society's response to it. We are developing methodologies to identify, measure and manage the physical and transition risks that we are exposed to through our own operations, our suppliers, our clients, and the markets we operate in.

Risk Appetite Statement

The Group aims to measure and manage financial and non-financial risks arising from climate change, and reduce emissions related to our own activities and those related to the financing of clients in alignment with the Paris Agreement.

Roles and responsibilities

The GCRO has the ultimate second line of defence and responsibility for Climate Risk, with support by the Global Head, ERM who has day-today oversight and central responsibility for second line of defence Climate Risk activities. As Climate Risk is embedded into the relevant PRTs, second line of defence responsibilities lie with those RFOs (at Group, regional and country level), with SME support from the central Climate Risk team.

Mitigation

We have completed c.4,100 Climate Risk Assessments (CRAs) in 2023 (c.85 - 90 per cent of the CCIB corporate portfolio limits), which measures transition risk of our clients. Concentration of Black and Red rated clients remain within proposed RA levels at 6 per cent. Linkages to Credit Underwriting Principles have been finalised for four sectors (Oil and Gas (O&G), Shipping, Commercial Real Estate (CRE) and Mining), including improved climate-related analysis, portfolio-level caps and additional data gathering measures. A key focus area going forward is to embed Climate Risk and net zero targets into business and credit decisions. To enable this, we have established a Net Zero Climate Risk Working Forum to facilitate discussions on account plans for high Climate Risk and net zero divergent clients. As of September 2023, we have assessed physical risk for 79 per cent and transition risk for 54 per cent of our CPBB book.

The focus for Operational and Technology Risk has been to assess physical risks for our properties and data centres, as well as third parties. Concentration of top corporate liquidity providers to high transition risk and low levels of mitigation is being monitored.

Page 91

Governance committee oversight

Board level oversight is exercised through the BRC, with regular updates on Climate Risk. At an executive level, the GRC has appointed the Climate Risk Management Committee (CRMC), which meets at least six times a year to oversee the implementation of Climate Risk workplans and monitoring the Group's Climate Risk profile.

In 2023, we have strengthened country and regional governance oversight for the Climate Risk profile across our key markets by cascading identified RA metrics, and rolling out climate risk management information.

Decision-making authorities and delegation

The Global Head, ERM is supported by a Climate Risk team within the ERM function. The Global Head, ESG and Reputational Risk is responsible for executing the delivery of the Climate Risk workplan which will define decision-making authorities and delegations across the Group.

Monitoring

The Climate RA Statement is approved and reviewed annually by the Board, following the recommendation of the BRC.

The Group has developed its first-generation Climate Risk reporting and Board/MT Level RA metrics and these will continue to be enhanced in 2024. Management information and RA metrics are also being progressively rolled out at the regional and country level. Management information is reviewed at a quarterly frequency and any breaches in RA are reported to the GRC and BRC.

 

Digital Assets Risk

With effect from January 2024, the Group has removed the IRT classification. The Group recognises Digital Assets (DA) as an asset class which is managed under the ERMF. DA Risk is defined as the potential for regulatory penalties, financial loss and/or reputational damage to the Group resulting from DA-related activities arising from the Group's businesses across clients, products, investments and projects.

Risk Appetite Statement

As DA Risk manifests through the various PRTs, the individual RA statements for each PRT take account of the risks specific to DAs.

Roles and responsibilities

Senior managers within the first line of defence are responsible for the overall management of DA risks, initiatives and exposures that may arise within their business segments.

The GCRO has the second line of defence responsibility for defining the Group's framework for managing DA-related risks, through the Digital Assets Risk Management Approach (DARMA). The GCRO is supported by the Global Head, ERM and the Global Head, DA Risk Management, who have day-to-day responsibility for second line of defence oversight of the DARMA. As DA Risk management is embedded into the relevant PRTs, RFOs and dedicated SMEs across the PRTs have second line of defence responsibilities of DA Risks for their respective PRTs.

Mitigation

The Group deploys a DA Risk management policy (DA Policy) to define the incremental risk management requirements for DA-related activities under the DARMA. The respective PRTs then include specific risk mitigation requirements within the relevant processes, policies and standards for their PRTs. DA Risk Assessments are conducted on certain higher-risk DA-related projects and products. These risk assessments detail the specific inherent risks, residual risks, controls and mitigants across the PRTs, and are reviewed and supported by the respective businesses, RFOs and DA SMEs.

Page 92

 


Governance committee oversight

Board level oversight is exercised through the BRC, and DA Risk updates are provided to the Board and BRC, as requested. At the executive level, the GRC oversees the risk management of DA. The GCRO has also appointed a dedicated DA Risk Committee (DRC) consisting of senior business representatives, RFOs and DA SMEs across the Group. The DRC meets a minimum of four times per year to review and assess the risk assessments related to DA Projects and Products, discuss development and implementation of the DARMA, and to provide structured governance around DA Risk.

Decision-making authorities and delegation

The Global Head, ERM is supported by a centralised DA Risk team within the ERM Function and is responsible for the design and maintenance of the DARMA. Decision-making authorities and delegation are defined in the DA Policy, outlining the incremental responsibilities and the embedding of risk management within associated policies and risk artefacts.

The businesses are responsible for implementation of the DARMA and respective business governance forums, PRT RFOs and DA SMEs utilise decision-making authorities granted to them by their respective businesses, PRTs or in individual capacities to assess and approve DA activities and exposures that may give rise to risk.

DA Risk follows prescribed robust risk management practices across the PRTs, with specific expertise applied from DA experts. Risk management practices are informed by the "Dear CEO" letters published by the PRA and the FCA in June 2018, with updated notices in June 2022. Further guidance from the recent publication of the BCBS d545 on the prudential treatment of crypto assets, which will be in effect from January 2025, has refined the risk management approach. DA is a developing area which will continue to mature and stabilise over time as the technology, together with its use in financial services and associated research, become more established.

Monitoring

DA Risks are monitored through the existing Group RA metrics across the PRTs. In addition, specific DA Risk Management Monitoring level metrics are reviewed and monitored by the relevant individual PRTs. DA risk decisions relating to other PRTs are taken within the authorities for the respective PRT.



Page 93

 

Capital review

The Capital review provides an analysis of the Group's capital and leverage position, and requirements.

Capital summary

The Group's capital, leverage and minimum requirements for own funds and eligible liabilities (MREL) position is managed within the Board-approved risk appetite. The Group is well capitalised with low leverage and high levels of loss-absorbing capacity.


2023

2022

CET1 capital

14.1%

14.0%

Tier 1 capital

16.3%

16.6%

Total capital

21.2%

21.7%

Leverage ratio

4.7%

4.8%

MREL ratio

33.3%

32.1%

Risk-weighted assets (RWA) $million

244,151

244,711

The Group's capital, leverage and MREL positions were all above current requirements and Board-approved risk appetite. For further detail see the Capital section in the Standard Chartered PLC Pillar 3 Disclosures for FY 2023. The Group's CET1 capital increased 10 basis points to 14.1 percent of RWA since FY2022. Profits, gains from the aviation leasing sale, movements in FVOCI and RWA optimisations were partly offset by distributions (including ordinary share buybacks of $2.0 billion during the year), impairments of the Group's investment in Bohai, lower FX translation reserves and an increase in regulatory deductions.

The PRA updated the Group's Pillar 2A requirement during Q4 2023. As at 31 December 2023 the Group's Pillar 2A was 3.8 percent of RWA, of which at least 2.1 per cent must be held in CET1 capital. The Group's minimum CET1 capital requirement was 10.5 per cent at 31 December 2023. The UK countercyclical buffer increased to 2.0 per cent which impacts Group CET1 minimum requirement by approximately 8 basis points from July 2023.

The Group CET1 capital ratio at 31 December 2023 reflects the share buy-backs of $2 billion completed during the year. The CET1 capital ratio also includes an accrual for the FY 2023 dividend. The Board has recommended a final dividend for FY 2023 of $560 million or 21 cents per share resulting in a full year 2023 dividend of 27 cents per share, a 50 percent increase on the 2022 dividend. In addition, the Board has announced a further share buyback of $1 billion, the impact of this will reduce the Group's CET1 capital by around 40 basis points in the first quarter of 2024.

The Group expects to manage CET1 capital dynamically within our 13-14 per cent target range, in support of our aim of delivering future sustainable shareholder distributions.

The Group's MREL requirement as at 31 December 2023 was 27.4 per cent of RWA. This is composed of a minimum requirement of 23.5 per cent of RWA and the Group's combined buffer (comprising the capital conservation buffer, the G-SII buffer and the countercyclical buffer). The Group's MREL ratio was 33.3 per cent of RWA and 9.6 per cent of leverage exposure at 31 December 2023.

During 2023, the Group successfully raised $8.1 billion of MREL eligible securities from its holding company, Standard Chartered PLC. Issuance was entirely in callable senior debt.

The Group is a G-SII, with a 1.0 per cent G-SII CET1 capital buffer. The Standard Chartered PLC G-SII disclosure is published at: sc.com/en/investors/financial-results.



Page 94

Capital base1 (audited)


2023
$million

2022
$million

CET1 capital instruments and reserves



Capital instruments and the related share premium accounts

5,321

5,436

Of which: share premium accounts

3,989

3,989

Retained earnings2

24,930

25,154

Accumulated other comprehensive income (and other reserves)

9,171

8,165

Non-controlling interests (amount allowed in consolidated CET1)

217

189

Independently audited year-end profits

3,542

2,988

Foreseeable dividends

(768)

(648)

CET1 capital before regulatory adjustments

42,413

41,284

CET1 regulatory adjustments



Additional value adjustments (prudential valuation adjustments)

(730)

(854)

Intangible assets (net of related tax liability)

(6,128)

(5,802)

Deferred tax assets that rely on future profitability (excludes those arising from temporary differences)

(41)

(76)

Fair value reserves related to net losses on cash flow hedges

(91)

564

Deduction of amounts resulting from the calculation of excess expected loss

(754)

(684)

Net gains on liabilities at fair value resulting from changes in own credit risk

(100)

63

Defined-benefit pension fund assets

(95)

(116)

Fair value gains arising from the institution's own credit risk related to derivative liabilities

(116)

(90)

Exposure amounts which could qualify for risk weighting of 1,250%

(44)

(103)

Other regulatory adjustments to CET1 capital3

-

(29)

Total regulatory adjustments to CET1

(8,099)

(7,127)

CET1 capital

34,314

34,157

Additional Tier 1 capital (AT1) instruments

5,512

6,504

AT1 regulatory adjustments

(20)

(20)

Tier 1 capital

39,806

40,641




Tier 2 capital instruments

11,965

12,540

Tier 2 regulatory adjustments

(30)

(30)

Tier 2 capital

11,935

12,510

Total capital

51,741

53,151

Total risk-weighted assets (unaudited)

244,151

244,711

1      Capital base is prepared on the regulatory scope of consolidation

2      Retained earnings includes IFRS9 capital relief (transitional) of nil (2022: $106 million)

3      Other regulatory adjustments to CET1 capital includes Insufficient coverage for non-performing exposures of nil (2022: $(29) million)



Page 95

Movement in total capital (audited)


2023
$million

2022
$million

CET1 at 1 January

34,157

38,362

Ordinary shares issued in the period and share premium

-

-

Share buy-back

(2,000)

(1,258)

Profit for the period

3,542

2,988

Foreseeable dividends deducted from CET1

(768)

(648)

Difference between dividends paid and foreseeable dividends

(372)

(301)

Movement in goodwill and other intangible assets

(326)

(1,410)

Foreign currency translation differences

(477)

(1,892)

Non-controlling interests

28

(12)

Movement in eligible other comprehensive income

464

(1,224)

Deferred tax assets that rely on future profitability

35

74

Increase in excess expected loss

(70)

(104)

Additional value adjustments (prudential valuation adjustment)

124

(189)

IFRS 9 transitional impact on regulatory reserves including day one

(106)

(146)

Exposure amounts which could qualify for risk weighting of 1,250%

59

(67)

Fair value gains arising from the institution's own credit risk related to derivative liabilities

(26)

(30)

Others

50

14

CET1 at 31 December

34,314

34,157




AT1 at 1 January

6,484

6,791

Net issuances (redemptions)

(1,000)

241

Foreign currency translation difference and others

8

9

Excess on AT1 grandfathered limit (ineligible)

-

(557)

AT1 at 31 December

5,492

6,484




Tier 2 capital at 1 January

12,510

12,491

Regulatory amortisation

1,416

778

Net issuances (redemptions)

(2,160)

(1,098)

Foreign currency translation difference

146

(337)

Tier 2 ineligible minority interest

19

102

Recognition of ineligible AT1

-

557

Others

4

17

Tier 2 capital at 31 December

11,935

12,510

Total capital at 31 December

51,741

53,151

The main movements in capital in the period were:

CET1 capital increased by $0.2 billion as retained profits of $3.5 billion, movement in FVOCI of $0.6bn were partly offset by share buy-backs of $2.0 billion, distributions paid and foreseeable of $1.1 billion, foreign currency translation impact of $0.5 billion and an increase in regulatory deductions and other movements of $0.3bn.

AT1 capital decreased by $1.0 billion following the redemption of $1.0 billion of 7.75 per cent securities.

Tier 2 capital decreased by $0.6 billion due to the redemption of $2.2 billion of Tier 2 during the year partly offset by the reversal of regulatory amortisation and foreign currency translation impact.



Page 96

Risk-weighted assets by business


2023

Credit risk
$million

Operational risk
$million

Market risk
$million

Total risk
$million

Corporate, Commercial & Institutional Banking

102,675

18,083

21,221

141,979

Consumer, Private & Business Banking

42,559

8,783

-

51,342

Ventures

1,885

35

3

1,923

Central & Other items

44,304

960

3,643

48,907

Total risk-weighted assets

191,423

27,861

24,867

244,151

 


2022

Credit risk
$million

Operational risk
$million

Market risk
$million

Total risk
$million

Corporate, Commercial & Institutional Banking

110,103

17,039

16,440

143,582

Consumer, Private & Business Banking

42,091

8,639

-

50,730

Ventures

1,350

6

2

1,358

Central & Other items

43,311

1,493

4,237

49,041

Total risk-weighted assets

196,855

27,177

20,679

244,711

Risk-weighted assets by geographic region


2023
$million

2022
$million

Asia

155,995

150,816

Africa & Middle East

38,393

40,716

Europe & Americas

46,106

50,174

Central & Other items

3,657

3,005

Total risk-weighted assets

244,151

244,711

Movement in risk-weighted assets


Credit risk

Operational risk
$million

Market risk
$million

Total risk
$million

Corporate, Commercial & Institutional Banking
$million

Consumer, Private & Business Banking
$million

Ventures

$million

Central & Other items
$million

Total
$million

At 31 December 2021

125,813

42,731

756

50,288

219,588

27,116

24,529

271,233

At 1 January 2022

125,813

42,731

756

50,288

219,588

27,116

24,529

271,233

Assets growth & mix

(13,213)

(985)

594

(10,033)

(23,637)

-

-

(23,637)

Asset quality

(4,258)

431

-

7,344

3,517

-

-

3,517

Risk-weighted assets efficiencies

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

Model Updates

4,329

1,420

-

-

5,749

-

(1,000)

4,749

Methodology and policy changes

2,024

85

-

93

2,202

-

1,500

3,702

Acquisitions and disposals

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

Foreign currency translation

(4,883)

(1,591)

-

(3,376)

(9,850)

-

-

(9,850)

Other, Including non-credit
risk movements

291

-

-

(1,005)

(714)

61

(4,350)

(5,003)

At 31 December 2022

110,103

42,091

1,350

43,311

196,855

27,177

20,679

244,711

Assets growth & mix

(4,424)

728

535

1,183

(1,978)

-

-

(1,978)

Asset quality

(391)

390

-

2,684

2,683

-

-

2,683

Risk-weighted assets efficiencies

-

-

-

(688)

(688)

-

-

(688)

Model Updates

(597)

(151)

-

(151)

(899)

-

500

(399)

Methodology and policy changes

-

(196)

-

-

(196)

-

(800)

(996)

Acquisitions and disposals

(1,630)

-

-

-

(1,630)

-

-

(1,630)

Foreign currency translation

(386)

(303)

-

(2,035)

(2,724)

-

-

(2,724)

Other, Including non-credit
risk movements

-

-

-

-

-

684

4,488

5,172

At 31 December 2023

102,675

42,559

1,885

44,304

191,423

27,861

24,867

244,151

 



Page 97

Movements in risk-weighted assets

RWA decreased by $0.6 billion, or 0.2 per cent from 31 December 2022 to $244.2 billion. This was due to a decrease in Credit Risk RWA of $5.4 billion, an increase in Market Risk RWA of $4.2 billion and an increase in Operational Risk RWA of $0.7 billion.

Corporate, Commercial & Institutional Banking

Credit Risk RWA decreased by $7.4 billion, or 6.7 per cent from 31 December 2022 to $102.7 billion mainly due to:

$4.4 billion decrease from changes in asset growth & mix of which:

$10.3 billion decrease from optimisation actions including reduction in lower returning portfolios

$5.9 billion increase from asset balance growth across the rest of the portfolio

$1.6 billion decrease from sale of Aviation business

$0.9 billion decrease from industry-wide regulatory changes to align IRB model performance

$0.4 billion decrease from foreign currency translation

$0.4 billion decrease from asset quality movements, reflecting client upgrades in Asia, Europe & Americas, partially offset by sovereign downgrades in Africa &
Middle East

$0.3 billion increase from model changes in Financial Markets and Lending

Consumer, Private & Business Banking

Credit Risk RWA increased by $0.5 billion, or 1.1 per cent from 31 December 2022 to $42.6 billion mainly due to:

$0.7 billion increase from changes in asset growth and mix, mainly from Asia

$0.4 billion increase due to deterioration in asset quality mainly in Asia

$0.3 billion decrease from foreign currency translation

$0.2 billion decrease from methodology change relating to an unsecured lending portfolio in Africa & Middle East

$0.1 billion decrease from industry-wide regulatory changes to align IRB model performance

Ventures

Ventures is comprised of Mox Bank Limited, Trust Bank and SC Ventures. Credit Risk RWA increased by $0.5 billion, or 39.7 per cent from 31 December 2022 to $1.9 billion from asset balance growth, mainly from SC Ventures.

Central & Other items

Central & Other items RWA mainly relate to the Treasury Markets liquidity portfolio, equity investments and current & deferred tax assets.

Credit Risk RWA increased by $1 billion, or 2.3 per cent from 31 December 2022 to $44.3 billion mainly due to:

$2.7 billion increase due to deterioration in asset quality mainly from sovereign downgrades in Africa & Middle East

$1.2 billion increase from changes in asset growth & mix

$2.0 billion decrease from foreign currency translation 

$0.7 billion decrease from RWA efficiencies 

$0.2 billion decrease from model changes in Treasury Markets



Page 98

Market Risk

Total Market Risk RWA increased by $4.2 billion, or 20.3 per cent from 31 December 2022 to $24.9 billion due to:

$2.4 billion increase in Standardised Approach (SA) RWA driven by higher Specific Interest Rate Risk relating to the traded credit portfolio, offset by lower net Structural FX positions

$2.1 billion increase in Internal Models Approach (IMA) RWA due to increased positions and increased market volatility

$0.5 billion increase in IMA RWA due to introduction of a new VaR model to address the rise in VaR backtesting exceptions in 2022

$0.8 billion decrease in IMA RWA due to reduction in the IMA multiplier with fewer VaR backtesting exceptions in 2023 than in 2022

Operational Risk

Operational Risk RWA increased by $0.7 billion, or 2.5 per cent from 31 December 2022 to $27.9 billion, mainly due to a marginal increase in average income as measured over a rolling three-year time horizon for certain products.

Leverage ratio

The Group's UK leverage ratio, which excludes qualifying claims on central banks was 4.7 per cent, which is above the current minimum requirement of 3.7 per cent. The leverage ratio was 6 basis points lower than FY22. Tier1 Capital decreased by $0.8 billion as CET1 capital increased by $0.2 billion and was more than offset by the redemption of $1 billion 7.75 per cent AT1 securities. Leverage exposure decreased by $7.2 billion benefiting from an increase in deduction for central bank claims of $19.6 billion, a decrease in securities financing transactions and add-on of $1.3 billion, partly offset by an increase in Other Assets of $7.2 billion, Off-balance sheet items of $4.5 billion and Derivatives of $2 billion.

Leverage ratio


2023
$million

2022
$million

Tier 1 capital

39,806

40,641

Derivative financial instruments

50,434

63,717

Derivative cash collateral

10,337

12,515

Securities financing transactions (SFTs)

97,581

89,967

Loans and advances and other assets

664,492

653,723

Total on-balance sheet assets

822,844

819,922

Regulatory consolidation adjustments1

(92,709)

(71,728)

Derivatives adjustments



Derivatives netting

(39,031)

(47,118)

Adjustments to cash collateral

(9,833)

(10,640)

Net written credit protection

1,359

548

Potential future exposure on derivatives

42,184

35,824

Total derivatives adjustments

(5,321)

(21,386)

Counterparty risk leverage exposure measure for SFTs

6,639

15,553

Off-balance sheet items

123,572

119,049

Regulatory deductions from Tier 1 capital

(7,883)

(7,099)

Total exposure measure excluding claims on central banks

847,142

854,311

Leverage ratio excluding claims on central banks (%)

4.7%

4.8%

Average leverage exposure measure excluding claims on central banks

853,968

864,605

Average leverage ratio excluding claims on central banks (%)

4.6%

4.7%

Countercyclical leverage ratio buffer

0.1%

0.1%

G-SII additional leverage ratio buffer

0.4%

0.4%

1      Includes adjustment for qualifying central bank claims and unsettled regular way trades



Page 99

Statement of directors' responsibilities

The directors are responsible for preparing the Annual Report and the Group and Company financial statements in accordance with applicable law and regulations.

Company law requires the directors to prepare Group and Company financial statements for each financial year. Under that law:

•  The Group financial statements have been prepared in accordance with UK-adopted International Accounting Standards and International Financial Reporting Standards as adopted by the European Union;

•  The Company financial statements have been properly prepared in accordance with UK-adopted International Accounting Standards as applied in accordance with section 408 of the Companies Act 2006; and

•  The financial statements have been prepared in accordance with the requirements of the Companies Act 2006.

Under company law the directors must not approve the financial statements unless they are satisfied that they give a true and fair view of the state of affairs of the Group and Company and of their profit or loss for that period.

In preparing each of the Group and Company financial statements, the directors are required to:

•  Select suitable accounting policies and then apply them consistently;

•  Make judgements and estimates that are reasonable, relevant and reliable;

•  State whether they have been prepared in accordance with UK-adopted International Accounting Standards and International Financial Reporting Standards as adopted by the European Union;

•  Assess the Group and the Company's ability to continue as a going concern, disclosing, as applicable, matters related to going concern; and

•  Use the going concern basis of accounting unless they either intend to liquidate the Group or the Company or to cease operations, or have no realistic alternative but to do so

The directors are responsible for keeping adequate accounting records that are sufficient to show and explain the Company's transactions and disclose with reasonable accuracy at any time the financial position of the Company and enable them to ensure that its financial statements comply with the Companies Act 2006. They are responsible for such internal control1 as they determine is necessary to enable the preparation of financial statements that are free from material misstatement, whether due to fraud or error, and have general responsibility for taking such steps as are reasonably open to them to safeguard the assets of the Group and to prevent and detect fraud and other irregularities.

Under applicable law and regulations, the directors are also responsible for preparing a Strategic Report, Directors' Report, Directors' Remuneration Report and Corporate Governance Statement that complies with that law and those regulations.

The directors are responsible for the maintenance and integrity of the corporate and financial information included on the Company's website. Legislation in the UK governing the preparation and dissemination of financial statements differ from legislation in other jurisdictions.



Page 100

Responsibility statement of the directors in respect of the annual financial report

We confirm that to the best of our knowledge:

The financial statements, prepared in accordance with the applicable set of accounting standards, give a true and fair view of the assets, liabilities, financial position and profit or loss of the Company and the undertakings included in the consolidation taken as a whole; and

The Strategic report includes a fair review of the development and performance of the business and the position of the Company and the undertakings included in the consolidation taken as a whole, together with a description of the emerging risks and uncertainties that they face

We consider the Annual Report and Accounts, taken as a whole, is fair, balanced and understandable and provides the information necessary for shareholders to assess the Group's position and performance, business model and strategy.

 

By order of the Board

 

Diego De Giorgi

Group Chief Financial Officer

23 February 2024



Page 101

Shareholder information

Important notices

Forward-looking statements

The information included in this document may contain 'forward-looking statements' based upon current expectations or beliefs as well as statements formulated with assumptions about future events. Forward-looking statements include, without limitation, projections, estimates, commitments, plans, approaches, ambitions and targets (including, without limitation, ESG commitments, ambitions and targets). Forward-looking statements often use words such as 'may', 'could', 'will', 'expect', 'intend', 'estimate', 'anticipate', 'believe', 'plan', 'seek', 'aim', 'continue' or other words of similar meaning to any of the foregoing. Forward-looking statements may also (or additionally) be identified by the fact that they do not relate only to historical or current facts.

By their very nature, forward-looking statements are subject to known and unknown risks and uncertainties and other factors that could cause actual results, and the Group's plans and objectives, to differ materially from those expressed or implied in the forward-looking statements. Readers should not place reliance on, and are cautioned about relying on, any forward-looking statements.

There are several factors which could cause the Group's actual results and its plans and objectives to differ materially from those expressed or implied in forward-looking statements. The factors include (but are not limited to): changes in global, political, economic, business, competitive and market forces or conditions, or in future exchange and interest rates; changes in environmental, geopolitical, social or physical risks; legal, regulatory and policy developments, including regulatory measures addressing climate change and broader sustainability-related issues; the development of standards and interpretations, including evolving requirements and practices in ESG reporting; the ability of the Group, together with governments and other stakeholders to measure, manage, and mitigate the impacts of climate change and broader sustainability-related issues effectively; risks arising out of health crises and pandemics; risks of cyber-attacks, data, information or security breaches or technology failures involving the Group; changes in tax rates or policy; future business combinations or dispositions; and other factors specific to the Group, including those identified in this Annual Report and financial statements of the Group. To the extent that any forward-looking statements contained in this document are based on past or current trends and/or activities of the Group, they should not be taken as a representation that such trends or activities will continue in the future.

No statement in this document is intended to be, nor should be interpreted as, a profit forecast or to imply that the earnings of the Group for the current year or future years will necessarily match or exceed the historical or published earnings of the Group. Each forward-looking statement speaks only as of the date that it is made. Except as required by any applicable laws or regulations, the Group expressly disclaims any obligation to revise or update any forward-looking statement contained within this document, regardless of whether those statements are affected as a result of new information, future events or otherwise.

Please refer to this Annual Report and the financial statements of the Group for a discussion of certain of the risks and factors that could adversely impact the Group's actual results, and cause its plans and objectives, to differ materially from those expressed or implied in any forward-looking statements.

Financial instruments

Nothing in this document shall constitute, in any jurisdiction, an offer or solicitation to sell or purchase any securities or other financial instruments, nor shall it constitute a recommendation or advice in respect of any securities or other financial instruments or any other matter.



Page 102

Basis of Preparation and Caution Regarding Data Limitations

This section is specifically relevant to, amongst others, the sustainability and climate models, calculations and disclosures throughout this report.

The information contained in this document has been prepared on the following basis:

i.    certain information in this document is unaudited;

ii.   all information, positions and statements set out in this document are subject to change without notice;

iii.  the information included in this document does not constitute any investment, accounting, legal, regulatory or tax advice or an invitation or recommendation to enter into any transaction;

iv.  the information included in this document may have been prepared using models, methodologies and data which are subject to certain limitations. These limitations include: the limited availability of reliable data, data gaps, and the nascent nature of the methodologies and technologies underpinning this data; the limited standardisation of data (given, amongst other things, limited international coordination on data and methodology standards); and future uncertainty (due, amongst other things, to changing projections relating to technological development and global and regional laws, regulations and policies, and the current inability to make use of strong historical data);

v.   models, external data and methodologies used in information included in this document are or could be subject to adjustment which is beyond our control;

vi.  any opinions and estimates should be regarded as indicative, preliminary and for illustrative purposes only. Expected and actual outcomes may differ from those set out in this document (as explained in the "Forward-looking statements" section above);

vii. some of the related information appearing in this document may have been obtained from public and other sources and, while the Group believes such information to be reliable, it has not been independently verified by the Group and no representation or warranty is made by the Group as to its quality, completeness, accuracy, fitness for a particular purpose or noninfringement of such information;

viii.          for the purposes of the information included in this document, a number of key judgements and assumptions have been made. It is possible that the assumptions drawn, and the judgement exercised may subsequently turn out to be inaccurate. The judgements and data presented in this document are not a substitute for judgements and analysis made independently by the reader;

ix.  any opinions or views of third parties expressed in this document are those of the third parties identified, and not of the Group, its affiliates, directors, officers, employees or agents. By incorporating or referring to opinions and views of third parties, the Group is not, in any way, endorsing or supporting such opinions or views;

x.   whilst the Group bears primary responsibility for the information included in this document, it does not accept responsibility for the external input provided by any third parties for the purposes of developing the information included in this document;

xi.  the data contained in this document reflects available information and estimates at the relevant time;

xii. where the Group has used any methodology or tools developed by a third party, the application of the methodology or tools (or consequences of its application) shall not be interpreted as conflicting with any legal or contractual obligations and such legal or contractual obligations shall take precedence over the application of the methodology or tools;

xiii.          where the Group has used any underlying data provided or sourced by a third party, the use of the data shall not be interpreted as conflicting with any legal or contractual obligations and such legal or contractual obligations shall take precedence over the use of the data;

xiv.          this Important Notice is not limited in applicability to those sections of the document where limitations to data, metrics and methodologies are identified and where this Important Notice is referenced. This Important Notice applies to the whole document;



Page 103

xv. further development of reporting, standards or other principles could impact the information included in this document or any metrics, data and targets included in this document (it being noted that ESG reporting and standards are subject to rapid change and development); and

xvi.          while all reasonable care has been taken in preparing the information included in this document, neither the Group nor any of its affiliates, directors, officers, employees or agents make any representation or warranty as to its quality, accuracy or completeness, and they accept no responsibility or liability for the contents of this information, including any errors of fact, omission or opinion expressed.

You are advised to exercise your own independent judgement (with the advice of your professional advisers as necessary) with respect to the risks and consequences of any matter contained in this document.

The Group, its affiliates, directors, officers, employees or agents expressly disclaim any liability and responsibility for any decisions or actions which you may take and for any damage or losses you may suffer from your use of or reliance on the information contained in this document. Copyright in all materials, text, articles and information contained in this document (other than third party materials, text, articles and information) is the property of, and may only be reproduced with permission of an authorised signatory of, the Group.

Copyright in materials, text, articles and information created by third parties and the rights under copyright of such parties are hereby acknowledged. Copyright in all other materials not belonging to third parties and copyright in these materials as a compilation vests and shall remain at all times copyright of the Group and should not be reproduced or used except for business purposes on behalf of the Group or save with the express prior written consent of an authorised signatory of the Group. All rights reserved.

 

Page 104

This information is provided by RNS, the news service of the London Stock Exchange. RNS is approved by the Financial Conduct Authority to act as a Primary Information Provider in the United Kingdom. Terms and conditions relating to the use and distribution of this information may apply. For further information, please contact rns@lseg.com or visit www.rns.com.

RNS may use your IP address to confirm compliance with the terms and conditions, to analyse how you engage with the information contained in this communication, and to share such analysis on an anonymised basis with others as part of our commercial services. For further information about how RNS and the London Stock Exchange use the personal data you provide us, please see our Privacy Policy.
 
END
 
 
UK 100

Latest directors dealings